Ricoh D009 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. Printer
  5. D009
  6. Service manual

Ricoh D009 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for D009:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

D009/D011/D012/
D013/D091/D092

SERVICE MANUAL

003315MIU

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Ricoh D009

Summary of Contents for Ricoh D009

  • Page 1: Service Manual

    D009/D011/D012/ D013/D091/D092 SERVICE MANUAL 003315MIU...
  • Page 5 D009/D011/D012/ D013/D091/D092 SERVICE MANUAL 003315MIU...
  • Page 7 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 9 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation...
  • Page 11 LEGEND PRODUCT COMPANY CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN D009 MP 4000B LD040B Aficio MP 4000B 9040b D011 MP 4000 LD040 Aficio MP 4000 9040 D012 MP 5000B LD050B Aficio MP 5000B 9050b D013 MP5000 LD050 Aficio MP 5000 9050 D091-17...

  • Page 13: Table Of Contents

    D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 TABLE OF CONTENTS PRODUCT INFORMATION PRODUCT INFORMATION ............1-1     SPECIFICATIONS ..................1-1     MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..............1-2     1.2.1 COPIER .................... 1-2     GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR   PRODUCTS ..................... 1-5  ...
  • Page 14 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........... 2-44     Support Tray Installation ..............2-48   2.12 PUNCH UNIT ..................2-49     2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............... 2-49     2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE........... 2-50     2.13 1000-SHEET FINISHER (B408) ............2-54     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 15 For installing the tray heater in the D351 (Two-tray paper feed unit) .. 2-67   For installing the tray heater in the D352 (LCT) ........2-70   2.19 HDD OPTION (D362, ONLY FOR D009/D012) ........2-74     2.19.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............... 2-74  ...
  • Page 16 VM CARD TYPE F (D377) ............2-105     Accessories ..................2-105   Installation ..................2-106   2.21.13 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS (ONLY FOR D009/D012) ..2-106     Overview ..................2-106   Kit Contents ..................2-108   Printer/Scanner Installation .............. 2-110  ...
  • Page 17 4.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ................. 4-9     4.4.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSORS ........4-10     Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012) ........4-10   Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092) ......... 4-11   4.4.3 EXPOSURE LAMP ................. 4-11     Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092) ......... 4-11  ...
  • Page 18 DEVELOPER .................. 4-43     4.8.4 TD SENSOR ................... 4-45     TRANSFER ....................4-46     4.9.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT ..............4-46     4.9.2 TRANSFER BELT ................4-47     4.9.3 TONER OVERFLOW SENSOR ............4-49     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 19 Paper Overflow Sensor ..............4-68   Fusing Exit Sensor ................4-68   4.12.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR ............4-68     4.12.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR ..............4-69     4.13 DUPLEX ..................... 4-70     4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT ................4-70     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 20 CONTROLLER BOARD .............. 4-90     Before replacing the controller board in the model without HDD ..4-90   Replacement Procedure ..............4-90   When installing the new controller board ..........4-91   After installing the controller board ............. 4-91   D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 viii...
  • Page 21 Service Mode Lock/Unlock ..............5-2   5.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ..........5-3     Service Table Key ................5-3   SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ............. 5-4     5.2.1 SP TABLES ..................5-4     USING SP MODES ..................5-5     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 22   4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 ............5-29   Key to Acronyms ................5-30   Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD ..........5-31   Recording Errors Manually ..............5-31   DIP SWITCHES ..................5-32     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 23 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION ....7-5     1. Duplex: ..................... 7-5   2. Combine mode: ................7-5   3. Duplex + Combine: ................7-6   D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES SEE D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES SECTION FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 24 SEE SECTION D351 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D352 LCT PB3050 SEE SECTION D352 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D353 1200-SHEET LCIT RT3000 SEE SECTION D353 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D381 PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION TYPE 5000 SEE SECTION D381 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 25 D386 BRIDGE UNIT BU3030 SEE SECTION D386 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D389 1-BIN TRAY BN3040 SEE SECTION D389 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS xiii D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 27: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS B802 ARDF DF3010 D346 FAX OPTION TYPE 5000 INSTALLATION APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE D351 PAPER FEED UNIT PB3040 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS D352 LCIT PB3050 D353 1200-SHEET LCIT RT3000 REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES B408 1000-SHEET FINISHER SR790 B804/B805 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020/FINISHER SR3030 D381 PRINTER/SCANNER OPTION TYPE 5000...

  • Page 29: Read This First

    Read This First Safety Notices Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are supplied with electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.

  • Page 30: Handling Toner

    Observance of Electrical Safety Standards This machine and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced incorrectly.

  • Page 31: Laser Safety

    Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer.

  • Page 32: Symbols And Abbreviations

    Symbols and Abbreviations Symbols and Abbreviations This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Cautions, Notes, etc. The following headings provide special information: FAILURE TO OBEY WARNING INFORMATION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

  • Page 33: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 35: Specifications

    Specifications 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information: General Specifications Optional Equipment D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 36: Machine Configuration

    Machine Configuration 1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION 1.2.1 COPIER Key: Symbol: U: Unique option, C: Option also used with other products Item Callout Machine Code D009/D011 D009/D011 D012/D013 D012/D013 D091/D092 D091/D092 ARDF (See Note 1) B802 Copier Platen Cover (See Note 1)
  • Page 37 -Punch Unit (See Note 3.) B702-27 (2/4-hole) -Punch Unit (See Note 3.) Metric B702-28 (4-hole) -Punch Unit (See Note 3.) Scandinavia Key Counter Bracket A674 HDD (for D009/D012 only) D362 DataOverwriteSecurity D362 Copy Data Security Unit B829 HDD Encryption Unit D377 Scanner Accessibility Option...
  • Page 38 The ARDF and platen cover cannot be installed together. The finisher requires the bridge unit and two-tray paper feed unit or 2000-sheet LCT. The 1000-sheet finisher and 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher cannot be installed together. The punch unit requires the 2000/3000-sheet (Booklet) finisher. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 39: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    1.3 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS The D091/D092 series are successor models to the D009/D011/D012/D013 series. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.

  • Page 40: Overview

    Overview 1.4 OVERVIEW 1.4.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT Exposure Glass By-pass Feed Roller 2nd Mirror By-pass Separation Roller 1st Mirror Duplex/by-pass transport roller Exposure Lamp Upper Relay Roller D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 41 Polygonal Mirror Motor Hot Roller Laser Unit Pressure Roller Toner Bottle Holder Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade Junction Gate 1 Duplex Transport Roller Exit Roller Transfer Belt Paper Exit Sensor OPC Drum 3rd Mirror Registration Roller Scanner HP Sensor By-pass Pick-up Roller D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 42: Paper Path

    Overview 1.4.2 PAPER PATH ARDF Interchange Unit Duplex Unit By-pass Tray Large Capacity Tray (LCT: 1200-sheet) Paper Tray Unit Two-Tray Finisher Bridge Unit 1-Bin Tray D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 43: Drive Layout

    Overview 1.4.3 DRIVE LAYOUT D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 44 Web Motor By-pass Paper Feed Clutch Transfer/Development Motor Registration Motor Drum Motor Duplex/By-pass Motor Development Paddle Motor Transfer Belt Contact Motor Tray Lift Motor 1 Duplex Inverter Motor Tray Lift Motor 2 Paper Exit Motor Paper Feed Clutch 2 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-10...

  • Page 45: Installation

    Correct IPDS Unit Installation firmware versions installed. 03/09/2012 Updated DataOverWrite Security 03/09/2012 Updated DataOverWrite Security 102 ~ 106 06/14/2011 Updated Browser Unit type D (D377-17) 102 ~ 103 10/12/2011 Important note Browser Unit type D (D377-17) 03/09/2012 Updated VM Card Type F (D009 Series only)

  • Page 47: Installation Requirements

    Rating voltage for peripherals: Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 48: Environment

    Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm (0.2"). Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 49: Machine Level

    D: Right > 55 cm (21.7") The 75 cm (29.6") recommended for the space at the front is for pulling out the paper tray only. If the operator stands at the front of the main machine, more space is required. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 50: Power Requirements

    Be sure to ground the machine. Input voltage level: North America 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12.5 A Europe/Asia 220 V to 240V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: more than 6.8 A Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10% to 15% Never set anything on the power cord. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 51: Installation Flow Chart

    Installation Flow Chart 2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently. Bridge Unit: Needed for the finishers. Paper Tray Unit or LCT 2000-sheet: Needed for the LCT 1200-sheet and finishers. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 52: Main Machine Installation

    Main Machine Installation 2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION 2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list: D009/D011/ Description D091/D092 D012/D013 Operation Instruction (-17, -19, -21, -29) Operation Instruction - Quick Reference...
  • Page 53 Main Machine Installation D009/D011/ Description D091/D092 D012/D013 CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - Administrator (-17, -19, -29) CD-ROM: Operation Instruction - App 2 Me (-17, -19, -29) 16 CD-ROM: SDK (-17, -19, -27, -29) 17 CD-ROM: P2600 (-17, -19, -27, -29) 18 CD-ROM: Driver (-19, only)

  • Page 54: Installation Procedure

    Main Machine Installation D009/D011/ Description D091/D092 D012/D013 31 Sheet - Caution: 16 Languages 32 Sheet: NECR (-17) 33 Sheet - Warranty: Chinese (-21) 34 Sheet - Name - Tel (-21) 2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Preliminary Procedures Put the machine on the paper feed unit or the LCT first if you will install an optional paper feed unit or the optional LCT at the same time.
  • Page 55 Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper feed unit or LCT. Keep these decals for use with these optional units. 10. Pull out the feeler [9] for the output tray full detection mechanism. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 56: Fire Prevention Cover

    Install the cover [1] at the right side of the copier. PCDU (Photoconductor and Development Unit) Open the front door. Open the right door [1]. Release the lock lever [2]. Pull out the PCDU [3] and place it on a clean flat surface. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-10...
  • Page 57 Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface. Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller. Remove the opening cap [5], and then install it in the opening [6] of the PCDU. 2-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 58 10. Remove the development roller unit [8], and set it on the paper. 11. Pour the developer [9] into the development unit. The developer lot number is embossed on the end of the developer package. Do not discard the package until you have recorded the lot number. ( p.4-43 "Developer") D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-12...

  • Page 59: Toner Bottle

    Unscrew the bottle cap [4] and set the bottle [5] in the holder. Push the toner bottle holder into the main machine until it locks in place. Turn the toner bottle holder lever [1] clockwise to lock it. Close the front door. 2-13 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 60: Paper Trays

    If the lot number is unavailable, enter any seven-digit number. Press SP Direct to highlight "SP Direct" and enter 2805, press , and then press "Execute" on the touch-panel. This initializes the developer. Press "Exit" twice to return to the copy window. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-14...

  • Page 61: Set Paper Size For Paper Trays

    However, if you change the "Auto Detect" with the UP setting, you can select the paper size. Check the copy quality and machine operation. Electrical Total Counter The electrical total counter no longer requires initialization. The new incrementing counter is set to "0" at the factory. 2-15 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 62: Exposure Glass Cleaner

    Attach the operation instructions holder [1] to the left side of the copier (snap rivet x 2). If a finisher has been installed, attach the operation instructions holder [2] to the rear side of the finisher (snap rivet x 2). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-16...

  • Page 63: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    Touch the "App 2 Me" line in the Startup Setting tab. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD. Touch the "App 2 Me" line. Set the setting of "Auto Start" to "On". Touch the "Exit" button. Exit the "User Tools" settings. 2-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 64 12. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice. 13. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on LCD. 14. Touch the "App2Me" line. 15. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On". 16. Touch the "Exit" button. 17. Exit the "User Tools/Counter" settings. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-18...

  • Page 65: Moving The Machine

    Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape. Do one of the following: Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors. Shrink-wrap the machine tightly. 2-19 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 66: Paper Feed Unit Installation (D351)

    You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-20...
  • Page 67 Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding. Grasp the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [3]. Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 2-21 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 68 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D351) Remove the tray 1 and 2 of the machine. Fasten the Spring Washer Screw [4]. Reinstall all trays. Attach the securing brackets [5] ( x 1 each; M4x10). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-22...
  • Page 69 [5] after installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater. Load paper into the paper feed unit. 10. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 11. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality. 2-23 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 70: Lct 2000-Sheet

    You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person, and may cause injury or property damage. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-24...
  • Page 71 Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT. Grasp the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [3]. Hold the handle [1] and grips [2] of the machine when you lift and move the machine. 2-25 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 72 5). But the cutout [7] is for attaching the tray heater. Therefore, attach the securing brackets [2] after installing the tray heater if you install the tray heater. Load paper into the LCT. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 10. Check the LCT operation and copy quality. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-26...

  • Page 73: 1200-Sheet Lct (D353)

    1200-Sheet LCT (D353) 2.6 1200-SHEET LCT (D353) 2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Front Bracket Rear Bracket Stud Screw Joint Pin 2-27 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 74: Installation Procedure

    Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. Remove the stand covers [1]. Release the locks [2] of the front and rear caster stands. Remove the caster stands [3]. Remove the paper path cover [4], connector cover [5] and the six hole cover [6]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-28...
  • Page 75 Pull out the front and rear rails [10], and then hang them on each bracket [11]. Connect the LCT cable [12] to the main machine. 10. Slide the LCT [13] into the main machine. 11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine. 2-29 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 76: Auto Reverse Document Feeder (B802)

    Auto Reverse Document Feeder (B802) 2.7 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER (B802) 2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty ARDF Attention Decal Sheet – Top Cover Stamp Knob Screw Stud Screw Platen Sheet D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-30...

  • Page 77: Installation Procedure

    Remove the all tapes and shipping retainers. Insert the two stud screws [1] on the top of the machine. Mount the ARDF [2] by aligning the screw keyholes [3] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws. 2-31 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 78 Place the platen sheet [6] on the exposure glass. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [7] on the exposure glass. 10. Close the ARDF. 11. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-32...
  • Page 79 12. Open the ARDF cover [8]. 13. Open the feed-in guide plate [9] and feed-out guide plate [10]. 14. Install the stamp [11] into the ARDF. 15. Close two guide plates [10] [9]. 16. Close the ARDF cover [8]. 2-33 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 80 19. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew referring to the "Copy Adjustments" in the section of the "Replacements and Adjustments". D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-34...

  • Page 81: Platen Cover Installation (G329)

    2.8 PLATEN COVER INSTALLATION (G329) Install screws [1] ( x 2) on the top cover as shown. Position the platen cover bracket [2] on the heads of the stud screws, and slide the platen cover [3] to the left. 2-35 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 82: 1-Bin Tray Unit (D389)

    Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. If the bridge unit (D386) has already been installed on the machine, remove it before installing 1-bin tray unit (D389). This makes it easy to do the following procedure. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-36...
  • Page 83 Remove the front right cover [1] ( x 1). Remove the paper exit cover [2] ( x 1). Keep this screw for step 5. Install the 1-bin tray unit [3] ( x 1, x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]). 2-37 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 84 3; M3 x 16). Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 10. Check the 1-bin tray unit operation. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-38...

  • Page 85: Bridge Unit (D386)

    Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. If you will install the 1-bin tray (D389) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the bridge unit (D386). This makes it easy to do the following procedure. 2-39 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 86 If the sensor feeler [1] is out, fold it into the machine. Open the right door of the machine. Remove the upper inner tray [2]. Remove the front right cover [3] ( x 1). Remove the connector cover [4] ( x 1). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-40...
  • Page 87 Bridge Unit (D386) Attach the two guides [5] to the cutouts [6] in the inner tray. Install the bridge unit [7] in the machine. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [8] and knob screw [9]. 2-41 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 88 Holder bracket [11] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (B408, B804 or B805).Do not install it at this time. 12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 13. Check the bridge unit operation. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-42...

  • Page 89: 2000/3000-Sheet Finishers (B804/B805)

    Support Tray Lower output tray (B804 only) Cushion (with double-sided tape) Small ground (earth) plate (B805 only)* : Four of these six screws are not used for this model. : Item No.11 is not used for this model. 2-43 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 90: Installation Procedure

    If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing this finisher. Bridge Unit (D886) Paper Feed Unit (D351) or LCT (D352) Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-44...
  • Page 91 2000/3000-Sheet Finishers (B804/B805) Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the finisher. Pull out the jogger unit [1], and then remove all tapes and retainers. 2-45 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 92 Install the ground plate [3] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6). Attach the rear joint bracket [4] ( x 2; M4 x 14). Attach the front joint bracket [5] and the holder bracket [6] ( x 2; M4 x 14). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-46...
  • Page 93 11. Close the front door of the finisher. 12. Connect the finisher connector [8] to the machine. 13. Install the upper output tray [9] ( x 1; M3 x 8). 14. Only for B804, install the lower output tray [10]. 2-47 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 94: Support Tray Installation

    If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [1], put the support tray [2] on the tray as shown. Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-48...

  • Page 95: Punch Unit

    The Punch Unit B702 can be installed in the 2000/3000 Sheet (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. 2.12.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Punch-out Waste Unit Slide Drive Unit Punch Waste Hopper Screws (M3 x 6) Side-to-Side Detection Unit Punching Unit 2-49 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 96: Installation Procedure

    Remove the rear cover [2] ( x 2) and open the front door. At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the cover to the frame. Remove the guide plate [3] ( x 2). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-50...
  • Page 97 Attach the slide drive unit [7] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws. 2-51 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 98 14. Install the punch-waste transport unit [12] in the finisher. 15. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves. 16. Remove the short connector [13] from the connector [14]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-52...
  • Page 99 18. Set the hopper [15] in its holder. 19. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine. 20. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on. 21. Check the punch unit operation. 2-53 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 100: 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

    (Use 4) Knob Screw - M4 x 10 Copy Tray Knob Screw - M3 x 8 Screw - M3 x 8 Rear Joint Bracket Grounding Plate Staple Position Decal Rear Joint Bracket = Necessary, --- = Not necessary D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-54...
  • Page 101 Be sure to keep screw [1] shown at the top left drawing above. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate later in this procedure. Install the front joint bracket [2] / holder bracket [3] ( x 2; M4 x 14) and rear joint bracket [4] ( x 2; M4 x 14). 2-55 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 102 Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever. Secure the locking lever (1 knob screw; M3 x 8). Close the front door. Install the copy tray [8] (1 knob screw; M4 x 10). Connect the finisher cable [9] to the main machine as shown above. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-56...
  • Page 103 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408) 10. Attach the staple position decal [10] to the ARDF as shown. 11. Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation. 2-57 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 104: Installation Procedure

    Hold the key counter plate nuts [1] on the inside of the key counter bracket [2] and insert the key counter holder [3]. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2). Install the key counter cover [4] ( x 2). Rear cover [5] ( x 5) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-58...
  • Page 105 Cut off the part [6] of the rear cover. Connect the harness to CN211 [7] on the IOB ( x 3). Peel off the double-sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover [8]. Reassemble the machine. 2-59 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 106: Installation Procedure

    2.15 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT 2.15.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rear cover [1] ( x 3) Install the key counter interface board in the location [2] ( x 4). Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-60...
  • Page 107 Connect the other terminal of the harness to CN214 [3] on the IOB ( x 3). Cut off the part [4] of the rear cover. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board and clamp it with three clamps [5]. Reassemble the machine. 2-61 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 108: Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)

    Move the scanner carriage [1] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor. Install the heater [2] in the scanner unit ( x 2, x 1) Put the cable through the cutout [3]. Release the heater relay cable [4] ( x 1). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-62...
  • Page 109 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) Route the heater relay cable [5] as shown ( x 3). 10. Connect the heater cable [6] to the heater relay cable ( x 1). 11. Reassemble the machine. 2-63 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 110: Tray Heater

    Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine. Connect the connector [1] of the heater to the connector [2] of the main machine. Install the heater [3] inside the machine ( x 1). Remove the connector cover [4] ( x 1). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-64...
  • Page 111 Tray Heater Release the heater relay connector [5] ( x 1). Connect the heater relay connector to the connector [6] (front side) of the main frame x 1). Reassemble the machine. 2-65 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 112: Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit)

    Tray Heater (Optional Paper Feed Unit) 2.18 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL PAPER FEED UNIT) 2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q'ty Tray heater On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91) Harness 2 (For G832) Harness 1 (For B800/B801) Screw M4 x 10 Installation procedure D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-66...

  • Page 113: Installation Procedure

    Install the tray heater [1] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1). Remove the two securing brackets [2] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [3] of the optional paper feed unit ( x 2). 2-67 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 114 Connect the harness [7] to the connector [8] of the tray heater. Route the harness [7] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). Connect the harness [7] to the connector [9] of the mainframe. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-68...
  • Page 115 12. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [12] (rear side) of the main frame ( x 1). 13. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit. 14. Attach the on/standby decal [13] to the right-hand side of the main power switch. 2-69 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 116: For Installing The Tray Heater In The D352 (Lct)

    2) Remove the right tray [2] while pressing down the stopper [3]. When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-70...
  • Page 117 Install the tray heater [4] in the optional LCT ( x 1). Remove the two securing brackets [5] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [6] of the optional LCT ( x 2). Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. 2-71 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 118 Connect the harness [10] to the connector [11] of the tray heater. 10. Route the harness [10] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). 11. Connect the harness [10] to the connector [12] of the mainframe. 12. Remove the connector cover [13] ( x 1). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-72...
  • Page 119 14. Connect the optional heater relay connector to the connector [15] (rear side) of the main frame ( x 1). 15. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT. 16. Attach the on/standby decal [16] to the right-hand side of the main power switch. 2-73 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 120: Hdd Option (D362, Only For D009/D012)

    HDD Option (D362, only for D009/D012) 2.19 HDD OPTION (D362, ONLY FOR D009/D012) 2.19.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q'ty For D009/D012 HDD Unit Screw Keytop: Copy Keytop: Document Server Knob Screw = Necessary, --- = Not necessary D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-74...

  • Page 121: Installation Procedure

    HDD Option (D362, only for D009/D012) 2.19.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the controller board [1] ( x 2). Install the HDD unit [2] in the controller board ( x 3). Reinstall the controller board in the machine. Remove the dummy keytops (top and second from the top).

  • Page 122: After Installing The Hdd

    HDD Option (D362, only for D009/D012) After Installing the HDD Do SP5832-001 to format the hard disk. Do SP5853-001 to copy the preset stamp data from the firmware to the hard disk. Do SP5846-040 to copy the address book to the hard disk from the controller board.

  • Page 123: Copy Data Security Unit

    Copy Data Security Unit 2.20 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT 2.20.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Rear cover [1] ( x 6) Controller unit [2] ( x 2) 2-77 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 124: User Tool Setting

    User Tool Setting Plug in and turn on the main power switch. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Data Security for Copying > "On". Exit the User Tools. Check the operation. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-78...
  • Page 125 Security for Copying" feature cannot appear in the user tool settings. And then SC165 will appear every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( Check All Connections at the end of this section). 2-79 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 126: Controller Options

    The names of the slots for the board and SD cards are embossed on the face of the controller plate. SD Slot 1, Slot 2 Slot SD Card RPCS Printer Unit Printer Unit Printer/Scanner Unit Data Overwrite Security D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-80...

  • Page 127: Board Slot

    Downloading/uploading NVRAM contents Board Slot Slot Board File Format Converter (MLB): D377 Bluetooth Interface Unit: B826 IEEE 802.11a/g, g: D377 IEEE 1284 Interface Board: B679 Gigabit Ethernet: G874 Only one of these boards can be installed at one time. 2-81 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 128: Ieee1284

    2.21.3 IEEE 802.11A/G, G (WIRELESS LAN) Installation Procedure Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11a/g, g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-82...
  • Page 129 Attach the "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) to the rear right of the machine. "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach them at the wrong places. Attach the clamps as shown above. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 8). 2-83 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 130: Up Mode Settings For Wireless Lan

    Range of Allowed Settings: 64 bit: 10 characters 128 bit: 26 characters Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Then select the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-84...
  • Page 131 2 Mbps: 270 m (295 yd.) 1 Mbps: 400 m (437 yd.) 10. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings. Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings: Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed SSID WEP Key 2-85 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 132: Sp Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11A/G, G Wireless Lan

    SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting. Used to confirm WEP Key the current WEP key setting. Used to show the maximum length of the WEP Mode string that can be used for the WEP Key entry. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-86...

  • Page 133: Bluetooth

    Insert the Bluetooth card into the Bluetooth card adaptor. Attach the antenna cap to the Bluetooth card. Install the Bluetooth card adaptor into the Bluetooth board. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). 2-87 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 134: Gigabit Ethernet

    Insert the Gigabit Ethernet Board into the I/F slot and fasten it with the screws. Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2.0: User Tools > Printer Features > List/Test Print > Configuration Page D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-88...

  • Page 135: File Format Converter

    Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below. SP No. Title Setting SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1" SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0" Check the operation. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). 2-89 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 136: Postscript 3

    Attach the slot cover [1] ( x 1). Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [3] to the front door. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option ( "Check All Connections" at the end of this section). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-90...

  • Page 137: Ipds Unit

    Make sure the following versions are installed: Firmware Name Version Firmware Number V7.12 or later D0135754D Websys V1.09 or later D0135755D ⇒ Printer (For D009/D011/D012/D013) V1.05 or later D0135758G Printer (For D091/D092) V1.01 or later D0925774B System/Copy (For D011/D013) V1.08 or later D0135751P System/Copy (For D009/D012) V1.08 or later...
  • Page 138 2. Execute the following commands: msh> set ipds up ***If you want to stop the function. msh> set ipds down B. [Enable the IPDS option via WebImageMonitor] 1. Log in to WebImageMonitor. 2. Change the setting to enable IPDS. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-92...

  • Page 139: Hdd Encryption Unit

    [User Tools]> "System Settings"> "Administrator Tools"> "Administrator Authentication Management"> "Available Settings" "Available Settings" is not displayed until Step 2 is done. If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure. 2-93 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 140: Seal Check And Removal

    Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner. Open the box. Installation Procedure For models which have the VM card, do the followings: Press "User Tools" button to enter the User Tools mode. Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-94...
  • Page 141 Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD again. Press "Startup Setting" tab. Stop all SDK applications with touching application lines. Exit the UP mode, and then turn off the machine. Remove the VM card from slot 2. Remove the slot cover [1] ( x 1). 2-95 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 142: Recovery From A Device Problem

    "nvram_key.txt" file. Remove only the HDD unit ( p.4-88). Turn on the main power switch. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the machine. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-96...
  • Page 143 11. Remove the SD card from slot 2. 12. Turn on the main power switch. 13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-001) and HDD unit (SP5832-001) with SP mode. 14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool. 2-97 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 144: Dataoverwritesecurity Unit Type I (D362)

    Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected). [System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available Settings] If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-98...

  • Page 145: Seal Check And Removal

    If the surfaces of the tapes do not show "VOID", remove them from the corners of the box. You can see the "VOID" marks [2] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again. 2-99 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 146: Installation Procedure

    Turn on the machine power. 10. Do SP5990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report). 11. Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area [a] of the diagnostic report are the same as those in area [b]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-100...
  • Page 147 16. Check the overwrite erase icon. The icon [2] changes to [3] when job data is stored in the HDD. The icon goes back to its usual shape [2] after this function has completed a data overwriting in the HDD. 2-101 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 148: Browser Unit Type D

    6 and 7 are required. Otherwise, skip to step 8. Push the “Login/Logout” key. Login with the administrator user name and password. Touch “Extended Feature Settings” twice on the LCD. Touch “Install” on the LCD. 10. Touch “SD Card”. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-102...
  • Page 149 HDD. This is because: - The SD Card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. - You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. 2-103 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 150: Update Procedure

    16. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch. 17. Remove the SD card from the SD card slot 2. 18. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with 19. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-104...

  • Page 151: Vm Card Type F (D377)

    Controller Options Rev. 03/09/2012 2.21.12 VM CARD TYPE F (D377) (D009 SERIES ONLY) Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below. Description Q'ty 1. VM SD Card 2. Decal 3. “Other Function” keytop Installation >PS< Switch the machine OFF.

  • Page 152: Printer And P/S Options (Only For D009/D012)

    Controller Options Rev. 06/14/2011 2.21.13 PRINTER AND P/S OPTIONS (D009/D012 ONLY) Overview This section describes the installation of the following items: RPCS Printer Unit Printer Unit Printer/Scanner Unit 256 Memory. Optional memory is required for each unit. Printer Enhance Option...
  • Page 153 There are two separate options not provided with the kits: 256 MB memory and PS3. 256 MB memory: Not provided with any option. However, every unit (RPCS, Printer Unit, P/S unit) requires installation of the 256 MB memory. 2-107 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 154: Kit Contents

    This is a common list for all the kits. Common Accessory Table This common accessory table lists all the items of the following units and options for the D009/D012 Series machines: RPCS: RPCS Printer Unit PU: Printer Unit...
  • Page 155 *1: The 256 Memory is a separate option and it is not provided in the kits. However, one memory unit is required for the installation of every print unit. *2: The number of keytops provided varies: Keytops Copy Document Server Printer Scanner RPCS Unit Printer Unit Printer/Scanner Unit Printer Enhance Unit Scanner Enhance Unit 2-109 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 156: Printer/Scanner Installation

    Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power supply cord. Remove the controller board [1] ( x 2). Install the 256 MB memory DIMM [2]. Install a hard disk (except RPCS Printer Kit). ( p.2-74) Reinstall the controller board. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-110...
  • Page 157 Insert the Printer/Scanner SD card [4] in SD card slot 1. Reattach the cover. Connect the LAN cable to the "NIC" connection. Connect the USB cable to the "USB" connection. 10. Remove the 1st, 2nd, 4th, and 5th blank key tops. 2-111 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 158: Printer Enhance, Scanner Enhance Options

    If you are going to update the RPCS unit with both the printer and scanner enhance options, the order of execution is not important. For models which have the VM card, do the followings: Press "User Tools" button to enter the User Tools mode. Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-112...
  • Page 159 12. When the display tells you copying is completed, touch "Exit", then turn the copier off. 13. Remove the option SD card from slot 2. 14. Turn the copier on. 15. Go into the User Tools mode and confirm that update was successful. 2-113 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 160 For models which have the VM card, do the followings: Press "User Tools" button to enter the User Tools mode. Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD. Press "Extended Feature Settings" on the LCD again. Press "Startup Setting" tab. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-114...
  • Page 161 This machine has two SD card slots only. However, more than two optional applications are supplied for this machine. Always keep SD card slot 2 vacant for servicing (except VM Card Type F). Because of this, SD card merge is required if a customer wants to use many applications. 2-115 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 162 The VM Card Type F cannot be merged, nor moved to another SD card. This card must be installed in slot 2. Case 2: PostScript3 is installed Merge all applications which the customer wants to use into the PostScript3 SD card. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-116...

  • Page 163: Check All Connections

    Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page. User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column. 2-117 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 165: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 167: Pm Tables

    PM Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 PM TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: PM Tables D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 169: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 03/09/2012 Removed steps 4 and 5 from Drum Removal Procedure. 03/09/2012 Removed steps 3 and 4 from Drum Re-Installation Procedure.

  • Page 171: General Cautions

    Do not touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands. After replacing the LD unit, do the laser beam pitch adjustment. 4.1.2 USED TONER Dispose of used toner in accordance with local regulations. Never throw toner into an open flame, for toner dust may ignite. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 172: Special Tools And Lubricants

    Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 187 A2309003 Adjustment Cam – Laser Unit A2309004 Positioning Pin – Laser Unit B6455010 SD Card B6456830 USB Read/Writer G0219350 Loop Back Connector 4.2.2 LUBRICANTS Part Number Description Q’ty A2579300 Grease Barrierta S552R 52039502 Silicone Grease G-501 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 173: Exterior Covers

    Upper Inner Cover Open the front door [A]. Upper inner cover [B] ( x 2) Lower Inner Cover Remove the front door [A] (pin x 2) Shield glass cover [C] Shield glass [D] ( x 2) Lower inner cover [E] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 174: Left Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.3.2 LEFT COVER Left cover [A] ( x 6) 4.3.3 REAR COVER Rear cover [A] ( x 6) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 175: Right Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.3.4 RIGHT REAR COVER Rear cover( p.4-4) Open the right door [A]. Scanner right cover [B] ( x 2) Right top cover [C] ( x 1) Right rear cover [D] ( x 4) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 176: Operation Panel

    The two screws [C] are shorter than the other screws installed in the inner two screw holes. Make sure that the two screws [C] are installed in the outer screw holes on the scanner front cover. Scanner front cover [D] ( x 2) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 177: Paper Exit Cover

    Exterior Covers Operation panel [E] 4.3.6 PAPER EXIT COVER Front right cover ( p.4-6) Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 178: Inner Tray

    Exterior Covers 4.3.7 INNER TRAY Left cover ( p.4-4) Upper inner cover ( p.4-3) Paper exit cover ( p.4-7) Inner tray [A] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 179: Scanner -1

    4.4.1 EXPOSURE GLASS Glass cover [A] ( x 2) ARDF exposure glass [B] Rear scale [C] ( x 3) Exposure glass with left scale [D] Position the black marker [E] at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 180: Original Length/Width Sensors

    Scanner -1 4.4.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSORS Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012) Exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-9) Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) Lens cover [B] ( x 2) Original width sensor bracket [C] ( x 1) Original length sensor bracket [D] (...

  • Page 181: Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092)

    Original width and length sensors [C] ( x 1 each) 4.4.3 EXPOSURE LAMP Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092) Operation panel with scanner front cover ( p.4-6) Exposure glass ( p.4-9) Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame. 4-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 182 1). Remove the clamp [F] ( x 1) Remove the pulley [G]. Release the cable clamp [H]. 10. Hold down the snap [I], and then slide the exposure lamp [J] to the front side. 11. Exposure lamp [J] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-12...

  • Page 183: Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012)

    Scanner -1 Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012) Operation panel with scanner front cover ( p.4-6) Exposure glass ( p.4-9) Rear cover ( p.4-4) Scanner rear frame ( p.4-13) Disconnect the exposure lamp cable from the lamp stabilizer ( x 1, x 2).

  • Page 184: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    2, spring x 1) After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.4-101). 4.4.5 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) Monochrome Scanner Model (D009/D012) Exposure glass ( p.4-9) Original length sensor bracket ( p.4-10)

  • Page 185: Color Scanner Model (D011/D013/D091/D092)

    SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): ( SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.): ( p.4-101) SP4–011 (Main Scan Reg): ( p.4-101) SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different. 4-15 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 186: Lamp Stabilizer

    2, x 2) Lamp stabilizer (CS model: x 4, MS model: stud x 2) 4.4.7 SIO (SCANNER IN/OUT) BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-4) Scanner rear frame ( p.4-13) SIO board with bracket [A] ( x 4, All D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-16...

  • Page 187: Scanner Hp Sensor

    Scanner left cover and Scanner top rear cover ( p.4-13) Exposure glass ( p.4-9) Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side. Remove the mylar [B] Remove the scanner HP sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1, two snaps) 4-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 188: Platen Cover Sensor

    Scanner -1 4.4.9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Scanner left cover and scanner top rear cover ( p.4-13) Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-18...

  • Page 189: Scanner-2

    Front scanner wire clamp [A] Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1) Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1) Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. 4-19 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 190 Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time. Insert the left end into the slit [F]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and the rear track of the movable pulley [H]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-20...
  • Page 191 Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail. 10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [R]. 11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [S]. 12. Install the scanner wire clamp [T]. 4-21 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 192: Rear Scanner Wire

    After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.4-101). 4.5.2 REAR SCANNER WIRE Exposure glass ( p.4-9) Scanner rear frame ( p.4-13) Scanner motor ( p.4-13) Rear rail frame [A] ( x 5) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-22...

  • Page 193: Reassembling The Rear Scanner Wire

    The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror image. Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive 4-23 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 194: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press "1"). Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark Press the lower right mark when " " shows. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-24...
  • Page 195 Press Cancel. Then start from Step 2 again if the "+" mark does not show where the screen is touched. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration settings. 4-25 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 196: Laser Unit

    Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. 4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS Two caution decals are located in the laser section as shown below. (See the next page for removal instructions.) 4.6.2 LASER UNIT D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-26...

  • Page 197: Laser Unit

    Do not disconnect the harnesses on the LD board [F] unless the LD unit has to be replaced. This board is precisely adjusted in the factory. Laser unit [G] ( x 2) When sliding out the laser unit, do not hold the LD board. Hold the laser unit. 4-27 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 198: Polygon Mirror Motor

    Laser unit cover [A] ( x 4) Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) After replacing the polygon mirror motor, do the image adjustment ( p.4-97). 4.6.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR Laser unit ( p.4-26) Laser synchronization detector [A] ( D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-28...

  • Page 199: Ld Unit

    After replacing the LD board, do the "Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment" (described in the following section). Keep the lower inner cover removed before doing this adjustment because you need to adjust the adjustor screw [D] on the LD unit with a screwdriver. Laser Beam Pitch Adjustment 4-29 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 200 If the image of the printout is getting worse, try reverse rotation (clockwise counterclockwise) Print the test pattern and check it out. Try steps 2 to 4 again until you get an image with no vertical stripes. Reassemble the machine after completing this adjustment. Correct: No vertical stripes appear D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-30...
  • Page 201 Laser Unit Incorrect: Vertical stripes appear 4-31 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 202: Pcdu

    Spread a large piece of paper on a flat surface. Make sure the area is free of pins, paper clips, staples, etc. to avoid attraction to the magnetic development roller. Reinstallation Open the right cover before you install the PCDU in the machine. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-32...

  • Page 203: Drum

    PCDU Rev. 03/09/2012 4.7.2 DRUM Remove the PCDU ( p.4-32) Toner cap [A] Insert cap [A] into the opening of the PCDU [B]. ⇒ Step 4 has been removed. Step 5 has been removed. 4-33 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 204 Open the PDCU [E] ( x 2). Bracket [F] ( x 1) Pull the drum [G] towards the front (the left side in the illustration) while releasing the charge roller [H] using the release levers [I], and then remove the drum D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-34...

  • Page 205: Re-Installation

    Put the opening cap [A in the previous procedure] back in its original place. ⇒ Step 3 has been removed. ⇒ Step 4 has been removed ⇒ After replacing the drum, do these SPs: SP 3001-2: ID sensor initial setting SP 2810-1: Grayscale Setting 4-35 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 206: Pick-Off Pawls

    If the pick-off pawl has marked the drum with a line, the pick-off pawl position can be adjusted using either method: Changing the spur position Changing the pick-off pawl assembly position After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the position. ( p.4-33) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-36...

  • Page 207: Charge Roller And Cleaning Roller

    If this is not done, the carrier will be attracted to the drum because the charge roller voltage will be too high. After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the position. ( p.4-33) 4-37 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 208: Drum Cleaning Blade 1

    Put toner on the edge of cleaning blade 1 and the mylar at the back side of cleaning blade 1 before re-installing this blade. After re-assembly, make sure that the front spring of the movable cleaning blade is re-attached to the position. ( p.4-33) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-38...

  • Page 209: Id Sensor

    Inner tray ( p.4-8) Exhaust duct ( p.4-87) PCDU ( p.4-32) Fusing unit ( p.4-56) ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) ID sensor [B] ( x 1) Do SP3-001-002 to initialize the ID sensor after replacing. 4-39 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 210: Development

    Development 4.8 DEVELOPMENT 4.8.1 DEVELOPMENT FILTER PCDU ( p.4-32) Open the PCDU. ( p.4-33) Upper development cover [A] ( Development filter [B] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-40...

  • Page 211: Development Roller

    Open the PCDU. ( p.4-33) Upper development cover ( p.4-40) Development roller [A] Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller. Cleaning Procedure PCDU ( p.4-32 Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above. 4-41 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 212 Slide the paper [A] along the length of the roller to clean the toner off the surface. Rotate the development roller [A] in the direction of the arrow until the section you cleaned is no longer visible. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-42...
  • Page 213 Open the PCDU. ( p.4-33) Upper development cover ( p.4-40) Development roller [A] Work carefully to avoid scratching or nicking the development roller. Cleaning Procedure PCDU ( p.4-32 Remove the two screws [A] and open the PCDU as shown above. 4-41 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 214 16. Turn on the main power switch, and wait for the machine to warm up. 17. Do SP2801 to initialize the TD sensor and enter the developer lot number. 18. After performing the TD sensor initial setting, remove the sheet of paper from the PCDU. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-44...

  • Page 215: Td Sensor

    Use fresh double-sided tape to re-attach the sensor. Pour new developer into the development unit and perform the TD sensor initial setting using SP2-801. When performing the TD sensor initial setting, cover the toner entrance hole with a piece of paper. 4-45 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 216: Transfer

    To avoid exposing the drum to strong light, cover it with paper if the right cover will be open for a long period. Open the right door [A]. Release the lever [B]. Transfer belt unit [C] Avoid touching the transfer belt surface. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-46...

  • Page 217: Transfer Belt

    Transfer 4.9.2 TRANSFER BELT Transfer belt unit ( p.4-46) Connector [A] ( x 1) Remove the springs (front and rear) [B]. Release the hooks (front and rear) [C]. Transfer belt with rollers [D] 4-47 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 218 When reinstalling the transfer belt, make sure that the belt is under the pin [F]. To avoid damaging the transfer belt during installation, manually turn the rollers and make sure that the new transfer belt is not running over the edges of any of the rollers. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-48...

  • Page 219: Toner Overflow Sensor

    4.9.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING BLADE Transfer belt unit ( p.4-46) Transfer belt ( p.4-47) Transfer belt cleaning blade [A] ( x 2) Avoid touching the edge of the new blade. Check the new blade for dust or damage. 4-49 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 220: Paper Feed

    Tray 1 and Tray 2 Rear cover ( p.4-4) Right rear cover ( p.4-5) Duplex unit ( p.4-70) Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. Paper guide plate [A] (hook x 2) Paper feed unit [B] ( x 2, x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-50...

  • Page 221: Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Rollers

    4.10.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper feed unit ( p.4-50) Roller holder [A] ( x 1) Pick-up roller [B] Feed roller [C] Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1) 4-51 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 222: Tray Lift Motor

    Paper Feed 4.10.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Tray lift motor 1 or 2 [A] ( x 2, x 3) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-52...

  • Page 223: Relay, Tray Lift, Paper End And Paper Feed Sensors

    Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each) Relay sensor bracket [D] ( x 1) Relay sensor [E] ( x 1, hook) Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1) 10. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook) 4-53 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 224: Registration Sensor

    Right rear cover ( p.4-5) Duplex unit ( p.4-70) Paper feed unit for tray 1 ( p.4-50) Paper Trays 1 and 2 Paper dust box [A] Pull out the paper dust container [B]. Remove two screws [C]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-54...

  • Page 225: Reinstall The Registration Sensor

    You can only access the screw on the sensor bracket from the inside (paper tray location) of the machine. 11. Registration sensor [H] ( x 1, hooks) Reinstall the registration sensor It is very difficult to secure the sensor bracket to the frame. First attach the sensor bracket with tape temporarily. 4-55 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 226: Fusing

    Pull the fusing unit [B] until you hear a click. The lock levers lock the fusing unit again at this time to prevent the fusing unit from falling down. Pull up the lock levers [A] again, and then remove the fusing unit [B]. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-56...

  • Page 227: Web Roller Unit

    Fusing unit ( p.4-56) Web roller unit [A] ( x 2) 4.11.3 BRAKE PAD Web roller unit ( p.4-57) Web left cover [A] (front: x 2, rear: stepped screw x 2) Web top frame [B] ( x 2) 4-57 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 228: Web Holder Roller And Web Rollers

    4.11.4 WEB HOLDER ROLLER AND WEB ROLLERS Web roller unit ( p.4-57) Web left cover ( p.4-57) Web top frame ( p.4-57) Web left frame ( p.4-57) Front gear bracket [A] ( x 2) All gears and bushings (rear side) [B] ( x 2) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-58...
  • Page 229 All gear and bushings (rear side) [D] ( x 2, spring x 1) Front bracket [E] ( x 2) 10. Web holder roller [F] (holder x 2, spring x 2) 11. Web take up roller [G] ( 12. Web supply roller [H] ( 4-59 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 230: Installing A New Web Holder Roller

    ). Make sure that the printed number [D] is outside the web take up roller. Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.4-58). Reinstall the front and rear gears and bushings ( p.4-58). Reinstall the rear gear bracket ( p.4-58). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-60...

  • Page 231: Pressure Roller Cleaning Roller

    Fusing unit ( p.4-56) Fusing exit guide [A] (lock x 2) Fusing front upper cover [B] ( x 3) Fusing rear upper cover [C] ( x 3) Fusing outer guide [D] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1) 4-61 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 232: Thermostat

    Fusing unit ( p.4-56) Web roller unit ( p.4-57) Fusing top cover [A] (front: x 1, rear: stepped screw x 1) Thermostat holder [B] ( x 2) Thermostat cover [C] ( x 2) Thermostat [D] (terminal x 2) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-62...

  • Page 233: Thermistor

    Fusing unit ( p.4-56) Web roller unit ( p.4-57) Fusing top cover ( p.4-62) Pull the two tabs [A]. Disconnect the two terminals [B]. Sensor stays [C] ( x 1 each) Thermistors [D] ( x 2, x 1) 4-63 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 234: Hot Roller Strippers

    5) The cords on this frame are still connected to the fusing unit at this time. Be careful not to damage the cords when removing the hot roller stripper [B]. Hot roller stripper [B] (spring x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-64...

  • Page 235: Fusing Lamps

    Fusing top frame with connector [B] ( x 9) Fusing front lower cover [C] ( x 2) Fusing front frame [D] ( x 3) Fusing rear lower cover [E] ( x 2) Fusing rear frame [F] ( x 5) 4-65 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 236: Hot Roller And Pressure Roller

    15. Fusing lamp-End (750W) [L] 4.11.10 HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing lamps-Center and End ( p.4-65) Hot roller [A] (snap ring x 2, gear x 2, bushing x 2) Pressure roller [B] ( x 2, bushing x 2) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-66...

  • Page 237: Paper Exit

    Paper Exit 4.12 PAPER EXIT 4.12.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT Fusing unit ( p.4-56) Fusing exhaust fan duct ( p.4-95) Paper exit unit [A] ( x 3, x 2) 4.12.2 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, AND PAPER EXIT SENSORS 4-67 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 238: Paper Exit Sensor

    Sensor bracket [D] ( x 2) Fusing exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1) 4.12.3 JUNCTION JAM SENSOR Paper exit unit ( p.4-67) Paper guide [A] ( x 3) Junction jam sensor [B] ( x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-68...

  • Page 239: Paper Exit Motor

    Paper Exit 4.12.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR Paper exit unit ( p.4-67) Motor cover [A] ( x 1) Paper exit motor [B] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) 4-69 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 240: Duplex

    Right rear cover ( p.4-5) Open the lower door [A] at the duplex unit. Release the tab [B] and remove the lower door (spring x 2). Open the right door. Release the front link [C] ( x 1). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-70...
  • Page 241 Push up the duplex unit a little bit, while pressing the bracket [D] to lock the spring [E]. Do not let the duplex unit open fully before releasing the wire (step 9). Otherwise, the lock for the spring [E] is released. Wire [F] ( x 1) 4-71 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 242: Right Door Cover

    4.13.2 RIGHT DOOR COVER Open the duplex door [A] and by-pass tray. Right door cover [B] ( x 4) 4.13.3 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-70) Open the right door. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-72...

  • Page 243: Duplex Entrance Sensor

    Open the right door. Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2) Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hooks) 4.13.5 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR Transfer belt unit ( p.4-46) 4-73 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 244 Transfer belt unit holder [C] ( x 1, x 1) When re-installing the transfer belt unit holder, make sure that the spring [D] correctly hooks onto the frame. Guide plate [E] (two hooks) Duplex exit sensor [F] ( x 1, hooks) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-74...

  • Page 245: Duplex/By-Pass Motor

    Duplex 4.13.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Frame [A] ( x 4) Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1) Duplex/By-pass motor [C] ( x 4, bushing x 8, timing belt x 1) 4-75 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 246: Duplex Inverter Motor

    Duplex 4.13.7 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR Right door cover ( p.4-70) Open the right door. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3) Duplex door [B] Duplex guide plate [C] ( x 3) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-76...
  • Page 247 Duplex Bracket [D] ( x 2) Duplex inverter motor [E] ( x 3, x 1) 4-77 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 248: By-Pass

    Adjust the projection [E] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). Install the by-pass paper size sensor so that the hole [D] in this sensor faces the projection [E] of the left side fence bar. Reassemble the copier. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-78...

  • Page 249: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    00001101 A6 SEF 00000111 B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111 4.14.2 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-72) By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2). By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks) 4-79 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 250: By-Pass Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

    4.14.3 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER Right door cover ( p.4-72) By-pass feed unit cover ( p.4-79) By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook) By-pass feed roller [B] ( x 1) By-pass separation roller [C] ( x 1) Torque limiter [D] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-80...

  • Page 251: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    Open the right door. Right door rear cover ( p.4-73) Transfer belt unit ( p.4-46) Transfer belt unit holder ( p.4-73) By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2) By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1) 4-81 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 252: Drive Area

    Drive Area 4.15 DRIVE AREA 4.15.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH Tray 1 and Tray 2 Rear cover ( p.4-4) Clutch bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, bushing x 1) Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-82...

  • Page 253: Development Paddle Motor

    Drive Area 4.15.2 DEVELOPMENT PADDLE MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Development paddle motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4.15.3 TRANSFER/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Transfer/development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4-83 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 254: Drum Motor

    Drive Area 4.15.4 DRUM MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Drum motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4.15.5 FUSING MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Fusing motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-84...

  • Page 255: Web Motor

    Bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Web motor [B] ( x 1, x 1) 4.15.7 PAPER FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Right rear cover ( p.4-5) Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4-85 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 256: Transfer Belt Contact Motor

    Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4.15.9 REGISTRATION MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-4) Right rear cover ( p.4-5) Registration motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1) Registration motor [B] ( x 2, x 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-86...

  • Page 257: Toner Supply Motor

    Drive Area 4.15.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR Left cover ( p.4-4) Upper inner cover ( p.4-3) Inner Tray ( p.4-8) Exhaust duct [A] ( x 2) Toner supply motor [B] (hooks, x 1) 4-87 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 258: Electrical Components

    4.16 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 4.16.1 CONTROLLER UNIT Controller unit [A] ( x 2) 4.16.2 HDD UNIT (STANDARD FOR D011/D013/D091/D092) Before replacing the HDD unit Copy the address book data to an SD card from the HDD with SP5846-051 if possible. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-88...

  • Page 259: Replacement Procedure

    HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods. Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced: document server documents, fixed stamps, document server address book 4-89 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 260: Controller Board

    SP5846-051 if possible. Replacement Procedure Controller unit ( p.4-88) HDD unit (if it has been installed.) ( p.4-88) FCU cover [A] ( x 3) Controller left bracket [B] ( x 5) Controller board assembly [C] ( x 4, connector caps) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-90...

  • Page 261: When Installing The New Controller Board

    ROM on the controller board from the SD card to which you have already copied the address book data if possible. For a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed, restoring the encryption key is required. Refer to "Recovery from a Device Problem" in the 4-91 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 262: Mother Board

    Turn the main power switch off/on. 4.16.4 MOTHER BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-4) Controller unit ( p.4-88) Exhaust fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1) Controller box [B] ( x 6, x 2, x 3) Mother board [C] ( x 6) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-92...

  • Page 263: Bicu

    Electrical Components 4.16.5 BICU Controller box ( p.4-92) BICU[[A] ( x 7, x all) 4.16.6 IOB Rear cover ( p.4-4) IOB [A] ( x 6, x all) 4-93 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 264: When Installing A New Iob

    Electrical Components When installing a new IOB The IOB is identical for the D009/D011/D012/D013. However, the DIP switches are set differently for each machine. Set the DIP switches on the new IOB board to the same settings as the old board.

  • Page 265: High Voltage Power Supply Board

    Right rear cover ( p.4-5) High voltage power supply board [A] ( x 3, x all) 4.16.9 FUSING EXHAUST FAN Rear cover ( p.4-4) Fusing exhaust duct [A] ( x 2, x 1) Separate the duct (hooks). Fusing exhaust fan [B] 4-95 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 266: When Installing The Fusing Exhaust Fan

    Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine. 4.16.10 CONTROLLER FAN Controller box ( p.4-92) Fan cover [A] ( x 2) Controller fan [B] ( x 1) When installing the controller fan Make sure that the controller fan is installed with its decal facing upward. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-96...

  • Page 267: Copy Adjustments

    Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-1, No. 14) to print the test pattern for the following procedures. Registration - Leading Edge/Side-to-Side Check the leading edge registration [A] for each paper type and paper feed station, and adjust it with following SP modes. 4-97 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 268 Check side-to-side registration [B] for each paper feed station, and adjust with the following SP modes. SP No. Specification By-pass SP1-002-1 Tray 1 SP1-002-2 Tray 2 SP1-002-3 Tray 3 SP1-002-4 0 ±4.0 mm Tray 4 SP1-002-5 SP1-002-6 Duplex SP1-002-7 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-98...

  • Page 269: Blank Margin

    Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-6 0.8 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm] M Size: Plain Duplex: Trailing Edge: SP2-103-7 0.6 mm [0.0 to 4.0 mm] S Size: Plain Duplex: Left: Plain SP2-103-8 0.3 mm [0.0 to 1.5 mm] Duplex: Right: Plain SP2-103-9 4-99 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 270: Main Scan Magnification

    The following procedure should be done after adjusting the side-to-side registration for each paper tray station. Use SP2-109-1 No. 14 (Trimming Area) to determine whether a parallelogram image appears. If the parallelogram pattern appears, perform the following procedure. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-100...

  • Page 271: Scanning

    3) Print the trimming area pattern to check the image. If the results are not satisfactory, repeat steps 5-1) to 5-3). 4.17.3 SCANNING Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustments. 4-101 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 272: Registration: Platen Mode

    Check the leading edge [A] and side-to-side [B] registration, and adjust them with the following SP modes if necessary. SP No. Specification Leading Edge SP4-010-1 0 ±2.0 mm Side-to-side SP4-011-1 0 ±2.5 mm Magnification Use the S5S test chart to perform the following adjustment. Sub Scan Magnification D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-102...

  • Page 273: Adf Image Adjustment

    0.0 mm ±3 mm Side-to-side: 2nd side SP6-006-2 Leading Edge SP6-006-3 0.0 mm ±5 mm Leading Edge: 1st side SP6-006-5 0.0 mm ±3 mm Leading Edge: 2nd side SP6-006-6 0.0 mm ±2.5 mm Trailing Erase edge: SP6-006-7 0.0 mm ±10.0 mm 4-103 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 274: Touch Screen Calibration

    If the + mark does not appear where the screen is touched, press Cancel and repeat from Step 2. When you are finished, press [#] OK on the screen (or press Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu and save the calibration settings. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-104...

  • Page 275: Service Tables

    SERVICE TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 19 ~ 20 03/09/2012 Added IMPORTANT NOTE to NVRAM Upload/Download...

  • Page 277: Service Program Mode

    Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 278: Service Mode Lock/Unlock

    If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1". After machine servicing is completed: Change SP5169 from "1" to "0". Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine. The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 279: Service Program Mode Tables

    Value stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, this default value (factory setting) is restored. Monochrome Scanner Model: D009/D012 Color Scanner Model: D011/D013/D091/D092 Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value. The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this Japan only value.

  • Page 280: Service Program Mode Tables

    Service Program Mode Tables 5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 5.2.1 SP TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information: System SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 281: Using Sp Modes

    Black Band (Horizontal) Grid Vertical Line Black Band (Vertical) Grid Horizontal Line Checker Flag Pattern Grid Pattern Small Grayscale (Vertical Margin) Grid Pattern Large Grayscale (Horizontal Margin) Argyle Pattern Small Two Beam Density Pattern Argyle Pattern Large Full Dot Pattern D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 282 Slant grid pattern Scanned + Grid pattern Gradation RGBCMYK Scanned + Gray scale UCR pattern Scanned + Color patch Color patch 16 (1) Scanned + Slant Grid C Color patch 16 (2) Scanned + Slant Grid D Color patch 64 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 283: Smc Print Out Lists: Sp5-990

    Press "Execute" on the touch panel. Select "Single Face" or "Both Face". After printing the list, press "Close" to return to the SP mode display. Press Exit twice to close the SP Mode screen and return to copy mode. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 284: Nip Band Width Adjustment: Sp1-109

    The OHP sheet stops in the fusing unit for about 10 seconds, then it exits automatically. Check the nip bandwidth [A]. Check the nip bandwidth around the center of the OHP. Nip band Specification: 7.0 ± 0.5 mm D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 285: Memory Clear: Sp5-801

    Initializes the automatic delete time setting for 005 MCS stored documents. (MCS: Memory Control Service) 006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings. Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all 007 Fax application TX/RX settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 286 014 Clear DCS Setting settings. Initializes the UCS (User Information Control 015 Clear UCS Setting Service) settings. Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report 016 MIRS Setting Service) settings. Initializes the CCS (Certification and 017 CCS Charge-control Service) settings. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-10...

  • Page 287: Software Reset

    Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once release both buttons. After "Now loading. Please wait" is displayed for a few seconds the copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation. 5-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 288: System Settings And Copy Setting Reset

    System Settings. You must press first. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system settings, press Yes. When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press Exit. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-12...

  • Page 289: Copier Setting Reset

    Copier/Document Server Settings. You must press first. When the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings, press "Yes". When the message tells you that the settings have been reset, press "Exit". 5-13 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 290: Updating The Firmware

    "0" button on the operation panel of the copier. Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-14...

  • Page 291: Updating Firmware

    If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D009" folder onto the card. Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model firmware you want.

  • Page 292: Firmware Update Error

    "E24" displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "Handling Firmware Update Errors" in this section) Firmware Update Error If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-16...

  • Page 293: Recovery After Power Loss

    SD card. No HDD available for stamp HDD connection incorrect or replace HDD. data download Insert the SD card with the remaining data Data incorrect for continuous required for the download, the re-start the download procedure. 5-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 294 Controller module download SD card and tray again, or replace controller failed board. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD Electronic confirmation check card is for another machine. Acquire correct failed update data then install again. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-18...

  • Page 295: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    4. Plug the SD card into SD card slot 2. 5. Turn ON the main switch 6. Execute SP5-825 7. Press to start downloading the NVRAM data. 8. Enter Engine SP data (if you performed Engine NVRAM clear SP5-801-002) 5-19 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 296: Sd Card Appli Move

    You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy other data to the same SD card that stores PostScript data. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-20...

  • Page 297: Move Exec

    Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec." Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. 5-21 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 298: Undo Exec

    Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2. This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine. 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-22...

  • Page 299: Self-Diagnostic Mode

    The self-diagnostic test follows the path of the flow chart shown below and checks the CPU, memory, HDD, and so on. An SC code is displayed in the touch panel if the self-diagnostic program detects any malfunction or abnormal condition. 5-23 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 300: Self-Diagnostic Test Flow

    Self-Diagnostic Mode 5.7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST FLOW D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-24...

  • Page 301: Detailed Self-Diagnostic Mode

    You will see "Now Loading" on the touch-panel, and then you will see the results of the test. A report is printed every time a detailed self-diagnostic test is executed, whether errors were detected or not. 5-25 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 302: Using The Debug Log

    Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination, then press D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-26...
  • Page 303 More than one event can be selected. Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4 Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows "Engine SC Error" selected. Example 2: To Specify an SC Code 5-27 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 304 Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key. The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered. The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules.) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-28...

  • Page 305: 4-Digit Entries For Keys 1 To 10

    5682 (NFA) 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB) 4600 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS) (GPS-PM) 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys) 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS) The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0"). 5-29 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 306: Key To Acronyms

    PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for the "PRINTER" column only. One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4 MB. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-30...

  • Page 307: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than 4MB, you can switch to another SD card. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.

  • Page 308: Dip Switches

    Dip Switches 5.9 DIP SWITCHES 5.9.1 I/O BOARD: DIP SW101 Location Japan North America Europe China Taiwan Korea Asia ON: Up, OFF: Down D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 5-32...

  • Page 309: Troubleshooting

    TROUBLESHOOTING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 311: Service Call Conditions

    Service Call Conditions 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For "Service Call Conditions" information, see "Appendices". D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 312: Electrical Component Defects

    CPU cannot detect the original size Original Length-2 Open 313-5 (SIO) properly. APS and ARE do not (S6) Shorted function correctly. CPU cannot detect the original size Original Length-3 Open 313-2 (SIO) properly. APS and ARE do not (S7) Shorted function correctly. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 313 Toner Overflow (S13) 217-B15 (IOB) CPU detects the toner overflow Shorted even the waste toner in the transfer belt unit is not full. Open Jam Z (Jam 26/27) Duplex Entrance 217-A8 (IOB) (S14) Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 314 The Paper End indicator lights 216-A10 (IOB) Open even if paper is placed in the paper tray 1. Paper End 1 (S21) The Paper End indicator does not Shorted light even if there is no paper in the paper tray 1. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 315 Paper Size 2 (S29) Paper size error in tray 2 (IOB) Shorted Lower Paper Height 1 Open/ 210-4 (IOB) (S30) Shorted Remaining paper volume in tray 2 on the LCD is wrong. Lower Paper Height 2 Open/ 210-7 (IOB) (S31) Shorted D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 316 Jam C (Jam 19) Fusing Exit 221-B5 Shorted Jam C (Jam 1) Paper overflow message is not Open displayed when a paper overflow condition exists. Paper Overflow 221-B8 Paper overflow message is Shorted displayed when a paper overflow condition does not exist. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 317: Switches

    The LCD goes blank when the front or right Shorted door is opened. "Open Cover" is displayed even if the right Open door is closed. Right Door 221-B10 (SW4) (IOB) The LCD goes blank when the right door is Shorted opened. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 318: Blown Fuse Conditions

    PFU or LCT) The machine does not detect a finisher. FU27 6.3A / 250V 6.3 A/ 250V (Power to optional Finisher) FU101 15A / 125V 8A / 250V No response FU102 12A / 125V 4A / 250V No response D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 319: Energy Saving

    ENERGY SAVING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 321: Energy Save

    Normally, Panel Off timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Panel Off timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips the Panel Off. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 322: Return To Stand-By Mode

    Return to Stand-by Mode Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. Max 10 sec. for D009/D011/D091 Max 15 sec. for D012/D013/D092 Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept. If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use.

  • Page 323: Energy Save Effectiveness

    Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later measurement). Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode. Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours) Here is an example calculation. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 324 508776. 520377. mode Off mode Time 11601.0 81207.0 Total Time of Data: d (min.) 17506.0 Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour) 291.77 Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.) 1602613.60 Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH) 26.71 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 325: Paper Save

    Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2. Combine mode: Reduce paper volume in half! D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 326: Duplex + Combine

    Total counter: SP 8581-001 Duplex counter: SP 8411-001 Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004 Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005 The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of single-sided and duplex jobs D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 327 If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously. The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of duplex/combine jobs. 2 in 1 mode: Simplex Sheet Duplex Paper Total counter Duplex counter Originals used Sheets used Saved SP8501-001 SP8421-004 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 328 Paper Save Duplex + 2 in 1 mode: Simplex Sheet Duplex Paper Total counter Duplex counter Originals used Sheets used Saved SP8501-001 SP8421-005 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 329: D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092

    D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES...
  • Page 331 D009/D011/D012/ D013/D091/D092 APPENDICES TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .........1-1     GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............1-1     1.1.1 GENERAL ..................1-1     1.1.2 POWER CONSUMPTION ..............1-4     1.1.3 PRINTER CONTROLLER ..............1-5     1.1.4 SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS ............1-6  ...
  • Page 332 SP6-XXX: PERIPHERALS ............4-153     SYSTEM SP TABLE-7 ................4-165     4.7.1 SP7-XXX: DATA LOG ..............4-165     SYSTEM SP TABLE-8 ................4-184     4.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG 2 ..............4-184     D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 333 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER ......4-256     4.11 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE ............. 4-259     4.11.1 PRINTER SP TABLES ............4-259     4.12 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE ............4-266     4.12.1 SP TABLES ................4-266     SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 335: Appendix: General Specifications

    APPENDIX: GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 337: General

    Metric version (%): 400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25 7R5E: Inch version (%): 400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 93, Reproduction Ratios 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25 Zoom: 25 to 400% in 1% steps SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 338 General Specifications D009/D011 40 cpm A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF) /D091 Copying Speed D012/D013 50 cpm, A4, 81/2" x 11" LEF, 1-to-1 (ADF) /D092 D009/D011 4.1 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2" x 11" LEF /D091 First Copy Time D012/D013 3.5 s, 1st Tray, A4/81/2"...
  • Page 339 More than 2,500 A4 pages for document server (ITU-T No. 4 Original Archive Chart) Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange (630 g) Total Counter Electric counter Mainframe Only Full System D009/D011 Noise Emission: 70 dB(A) or less 74 dB(A) or less /D091 Copying D012/D013 72 dB(A) or less 76 dB(A) or less...

  • Page 340: Power Consumption

    EU, Asia 105 W EU, Asia 105 W 5.5 W 5.5 W Sleep Mode D009/D011: 5.7 W D012/D013: 5.6 W EU, Asia EU, Asia D091: 5.3 W D092: 5.3 W Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Less than 1.44 kW (NA) Maximum Less than 1.5 kW (EU, Asia)

  • Page 341: Printer Controller

    D009/D012/D091: Maximum 40 ppm (A4/LT LEF) Printing Speed: D011/D013/D092: Maximum 50 ppm (A4/LT LEF) PCL6/PCL5e PostScript 3 (Option) Printer Languages: RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream - an original Ricoh PDL, For D009/D011/D012/D013 only) IPDS RPCS 200/600 dpi For D009/D011/D012/D013 only 300/600 dpi...

  • Page 342: Scanner Specifications

    CS model: 109 MB (A4/ Full color/ 600dpi) Number of originals per file: Maximum 1,000 pages Image Storage Capacity: Maximum of files: 3000 files Max. Storage on Doc. Svr. 9,000 pages (B&W (ITUT No. 1/200 dpi MMR) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 343: Optional Equipment

    48.9 to 200 % Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption: Less than 60W Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 mm x 520 mm x 135 mm (22.4"x20.5"x5.3") Weight: Less than 12kg (26.5 lb.) SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 344: Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

    DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer) Power Consumption: 50 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.) Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.) Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2") D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 345: Lct 1200-Sheet

    , 20 lb., A4) Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier) Power Consumption: Less than 1 W Weight: 2 kg Size (W x D x H): 465 mm x 440 mm x 219 mm (18.3"x17.3"x8.6") SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 346: Bridge Unit

    Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m (16 to 42 lb.) 250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller) Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller) 30 sheets (B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-10 SM Appendix...

  • Page 347: Lower Tray

    Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer) Power Consumption: 50 W Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs) Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1") SM Appendix 1-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 348: 3000-Sheet Finisher

    5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17" SEF, Paper Size 12" x 18" SEF Paper Weight 52 g/m - 256 g/m (14 lb. - 68 lb.) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 349 Others 2 - 14 pages 100 sets A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 Stapled Stack Capacity LEF & B4 SEF, 8.5" x11" 2 - 30 pages 50 set (mixed sizes) LEF & 11" x 17" SEF SM Appendix 1-13 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 350: 2000-Sheet Booklet Finisher

    100 sheets A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF Paper Size 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF Paper Weight 52 g/m - 256 g/m (14 lb. - 68 lb.) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 351 SEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF & 11" x 17" Staples Capacity Size A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF, Booklet Stapling 15 sheets 8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF SM Appendix 1-15 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 352 2 - 5 pages A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF Booklet Staple 8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 11" x 17" SEF 6 - 10 pages Capacity 12" x 18" SEF 11 - 15 pages D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-16 SM Appendix...

  • Page 353: Punch Unit For 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher1-17

    A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11" A3, B4, 11"x17" EU 4-holes A4, B5, 8.5" x 11" A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" Scandinavia 4-holes A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11" SM Appendix 1-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 354: Usb Specifications

    Based on Bluetooth V1.1 Data Transfer Speed 1 Mbps Hard Copy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Profile Port Profile (SPP), BIP 10 m (The maximum distance when using outdoors, Distance Between Devices otherwise depends on the office environment.) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 1-18 SM Appendix...

  • Page 355: Appendix: Pm Tables

    APPENDIX: PM TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...

  • Page 357: Mainframe

    Optics cloth Scanner Guide Rails Do not use alcohol. Exposure Glass Cleaner Toner Shield Glass Dry cloth or cleaner APS Sensor Dry cloth Exposure Glass (Sheet Cleaner through) Drum (OPC) Area OPC Drum Charge Roller Charge Roller Cleaning SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 358 Blower brush. Cleaning Entrance Seal Replace if required. Side Seal Development Unit Development Drive Dry cloth Gears Development Filter Development filter: front Development filter: rear Developer Entrance Seal Side Seal Development Roller Dry cloth D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 359 Paper Feed Guides Dry cloth Relay Rollers Water Bottom Plate Pad Water Bottom Plate Pad Water (By-pass feed) Registration Sensor Blower brush By-pass Feed Roller Silicone Grease G-501 Gear Relay Sensors Blower Brush Paper Feed Sensors Blower Brush SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 360 To prevent damage to the Transfer Belt cleaning blade, always replace these items together. Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade Transfer Belt Rollers Dry cloth Entrance Seal Dry cloth Transfer Entrance Guide Dry cloth Used Toner Tank Empty the tank D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 361 Due to their durability and extended service life, the feed rollers, separation rollers, and pick-up rollers of the mainframe, optional paper trays, and LCT are not replaced at PM. : Lubricate the by-pass feed clutch gear with Silicone Grease G501 every P.M. SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 362 Water or alcohol Exit Guide Plates Hot Roller Pressure Roller Fusing Thermistors Cleaning Roller Grease: Barrierta JFE 55/2 Bushings Hot Roller Strippers Paper Exit Guide Ribs Water or alcohol Web Supply Roller Web Holder Roller Brake Pad D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 363: Options

    Platen Sheet Cover Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.) White Plate Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear Grease G501 Transport Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Exit Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth; alcohol Idle Rollers Damp cloth; alcohol SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 364: Pfu

    150K 300K 450K Note LCT 2000-sheet Bottom Plate Pad Dry or damp cloth SR5020 B408 150K 300K 450K Note 1000-Sheet Finisher Rollers Water or alcohol. Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush Jogger Fences Replace if required. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 365: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher

    Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush Jogger Fences Replace if required. Punch Unit Punch Chads Discard chads. Bridge Unit D386 Note Bridge Unit Rollers Dry or damp cloth Copy Tray Dry or damp cloth Sensors Blower brush SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 366: 1-Bin Tray Unit

    PM Tables 1-Bin Tray Unit D389 Note 1-Bin Tray Unit Rollers Dry or damp cloth Copy Tray Dry or damp cloth Sensors Blower brush D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 2-10 SM Appendix...

  • Page 367: Appendix: Service Call Conditions

    APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 03/09/2012 Corrected SC 220 03/09/2012 Corrected SC 221 12/28/2010...
  • Page 369 The job in progress will be erased The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds. The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or touch "Reset" on the screen to reset the machine immediately and go back to the copy screen. SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 370: Sc Code Descriptions

    The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 371: Sc Tables: Sc1Xx

    Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor disconnected Harness between SIB and scanner drive motor power source disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SIB and HP sensor disconnected Scanner wire, timing belt, pulley, or carriage defective BICU defective SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 372 White level detection error (Color Scanner model only) The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. Dirty exposure glass or optics section SBU board defective Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective BICU defective D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 373 The power ON of the SBU is not Defective harness Defective detection port on the detected. BICU -003: GASBU reset error Defective SBU The serial communication does not Defective detection circuit on the BICU work. Defective harness SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 374 "ON" with the initial setting. A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set to "ON" with the initial setting. Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 375: Sc Tables: Sc2Xx

    The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally ⇒ Worn out LD Damaged LD Harness IPU Defective SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 376 FGATE signal and sends it to the LD unit when the registration sensor switches on.) BICU defective BICU, Controller board harness loose or broken Controller board defective. LD error The BICU detected a problem at the LD unit. Worn-out LD Disconnected or broken harness of the LD. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...

  • Page 377: Sc Tables: Sc3Xx

    The development roller bias leak is detected for 60 ms after the high voltage has been supplied to the development unit. Development bias leak Broken harness Defective high voltage power supply, voltage supply Defective high voltage supply unit SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 378 2) Vsg < 2.5V 3) Vsp =0V 4) Vsg = 0V ID sensor connector defective Poor ID sensor connector connection I/O board (IOB) defective Poor writing of ID sensor pattern on the drum High voltage supply board defective D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 379 When the grayscale control result is the maximum and it does not operate correctly and these cases are detected 15 times. ID sensor defective or dirty The life of ID sensor or photo conductor Shield glass dirty SM Appendix 3-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 380 Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective Drum motor error The machine detects a lock signal error from the drum motor for 2 seconds after the drum motor turned on. Overload on the motor Defective drum motor Defective harness Defective IOB D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-12 SM Appendix...

  • Page 381: Sc Tables: Sc4Xx

    Disconnected connector Transfer/Development motor error The machine detects a lock signal error from the transfer/development motor for 2 seconds after the transfer/development motor turned on. Overload on the motor Defective transfer/development motor Defective harness Defective IOB SM Appendix 3-13 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 382: Sc Tables: Sc5Xx

    An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the motor drive and caused an overload. Tray lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged Tray lift sensor defective Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged Tray lift motor defective D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 383 Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection Defective tray motor or connector disconnection Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection SM Appendix 3-15 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 384 When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds. -2 B If this condition occurs three consecutive times, the SC is generated. Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 385 Defective IOB Disconnected harness Exhaust fan motor error The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 10 seconds after turning on the exhaust fan motor. Defective exhaust fan motor or connector disconnection. Defective IOB Disconnected harness SM Appendix 3-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 386 The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 2 seconds after turning on the fusing motor. Motor overload Defective fusing motor or connector disconnection. Defective IOB Disconnected harness Fusing thermistor open (center) The thermistor (center) detects 0°C or less for 5 sec. Fusing thermistor disconnected Fusing thermistor connector defective D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-18 SM Appendix...
  • Page 387 I/O board (IOB) defective BICU defective Fusing lamp consecutive full power 1 After warm-up the fusing lamp remains at full power for 15 seconds without the hot roller rotating. Disconnected or defective thermistors (center) Defective fusing lamp SM Appendix 3-19 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 388 7.5 sec. just after the fusing temperature reached 45°C. The temperature of the end thermistor does not reach the target temperature for 31 seconds after the fusing lamps turned on. Thermistor warped or broken D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-20 SM Appendix...
  • Page 389 Zero cross frequency error When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs. Noise (High frequency) SM Appendix 3-21 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 390 The jam counter is reset after a sheet of paper successfully passes the fusing exit sensor after the cause of the jam has been removed. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-22 SM Appendix...

  • Page 391: Sc Tables: Sc6Xx

    IOB board defective External noise Communication timeout error between IOB and finisher or mailbox A break (low) signal is received from the finisher or the mailbox. Disconnected cable Defective IOB Defective main board in the peripherals SM Appendix 3-23 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 392 A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS. Communication line error MF accounting device error 1 The controller sends data to the accounting device, but the device does not respond. This occurs three times. Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 393 2. Install the DESS module. broken. 3. There is no DESS module in the machine. Version error 1. The version of the expanded -002 2. Install the correct expanded authentication module is not authentication module file. correct. SM Appendix 3-25 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 394 Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting. -004 Same as -001 Check and set the correct AT command (SP5816-160). Communication line error The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication line -005 or defective connection. Same as -001 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 395 An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection. Caused by a software bug EEPROM error Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the EEPROM error. Caused by noise SM Appendix 3-27 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 396 Connections between BICU and controller board are loose, disconnected, or damaged Replace the BICU Replace the controller board BICU error The model code from the BICU is not correct when the machine is turned Install the correct BICU for this model. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 397 The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the registration sensor. Harness Disconnection at BICU Controller board loose or broken Defective BICU Defective Controller Board SM Appendix 3-29 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 398: Sc Tables: Sc7Xx

    The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective Jogger motor disconnected, defective Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction Finisher main board and jogger motor D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 399 The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Guide plate motor disconnected, defective Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective SM Appendix 3-31 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 400 The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. Shift jogger retraction motor broken Shift jogger retraction motor connection loose Shift jogger retraction motor overloaded Defective shift jogger retraction HP sensor D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 401 The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after the staple unit moves to its home position. The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the staple unit moves from its home position. Staple jam Motor overload Defective stapler motor SM Appendix 3-33 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 402 The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code. For the 2000-sheet booklet finisher The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time. Motor overload Loose connection of the front stapler motor Defective front stapler motor D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 403 Return roller motor error This occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective Motor overloaded Home position sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective Home position defective SM Appendix 3-35 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 404 The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code. Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective Defective motor D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-36 SM Appendix...
  • Page 405 The clamp roller movement is not finished within a certain time. The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code. Motor harness loose, broken Motor drive obstructed Motor defective SM Appendix 3-37 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 406 The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge unit. Defective connector Broken harness Finisher error The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit. Defective connector Defective harness Incorrect installation D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-38 SM Appendix...

  • Page 407: Sc Tables: Sc8Xx

    OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted. OS Flash ROM data defective; change the controller firmware SD card data defective; use another SD card SM Appendix 3-39 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 408 Optional board defective Replace controller firmware For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code. The error code is not displayed on the operation panel. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 409 SC code Detailed error code Program address CPU/Memory Error System firmware problem [0702] Defective RAM-DIMM [0709] Defective controller [070A] Reinstall the controller system software. Replace the RAM-DIMM. Replace the controller. SM Appendix 3-41 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 410 Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1 The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the [50A2] video bridge device. Defective I/F between the video bridge device and controller D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 411 ROM. PHY IC error [6104] The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized. PHY IC loop-back error [6105] An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller. SM Appendix 3-43 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 412 NVRAM without RTC installed Discharged backup battery Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code Verification error Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM). [0201] Loose connection Defective SDRAM DIMM Defective controller D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 413 Memory structure data error The memory structure data error for the optional RAM (SDRAM DIMM) is detected when the self-diagnostic is executed. [0302] Defective RAM DIMM Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM Defective 12C bus Replace the RAM DIMM. SM Appendix 3-45 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 414 IEEE1284 connector error [1102] Centronic loopback connector defective Replace the controller board. Loopback connector is connected but check results in an error. ASIC device error [110C] IEEE1284 connector error Centronic loopback connector defective Replace the controller board. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 415 [9110] Defective controller baord IEEE 1394 I/F error Driver setting incorrect and cannot be used by the 1394 I/F. Not supported by this machine NIB (PHY), LINK module defective; change the Interface Board Controller board defective SM Appendix 3-47 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 416 An error was detected on the wireless LAN card (Bluetooth). Wireless LAN card defective PCI connector (to the mother board) loose USB I/F Error The USB driver is not stable and caused an error. Bad USB card connection Replace the controller board D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 417 NVRAM data encryption error 2: An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted. [30] Defective controller board Replace the controller board. Other error: A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted. [31] Same as SC991 SM Appendix 3-49 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 418 HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 s. HDD is not initialized Label data is corrupted Defective HDD Initialize the HDD with SP5832-001. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 419 HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data transfer does not execute normally while data is being written to the HDD. HDD defective SM Appendix 3-51 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 420 An error occurs while an SD card is used. SD card not inserted correctly SD card defective Controller board defective Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver 1.1. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-52 SM Appendix...
  • Page 421 An error is detected on the HDD immediately after the machine has been turned on, or power has been turned off while the machine has used the HDD. Do SP5832-008 (Format HDD – Mail TX Data) to initialize the HDD. Replace the HDD SM Appendix 3-53 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 422 Damaged log data file in the HDD Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 2 HDD encryption unit not installed -002 Ask the customer's administrator to disable the HDD encryption setting with a user tool. Install the HDD encryption unit. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 423 Installed a NVRAM or HDD which was used in another machine -005 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 99 -099 Other than the above causes Ask your supervisor. SM Appendix 3-55 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 424 Defective flash ROM on the controller board Replace the controller board. File Format Converter (MLB) error A request to get access to the MLB is not answered within the specified time. MLB defective, replace the MLB D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-56 SM Appendix...

  • Page 425: Sc Tables: Sc9Xx

    (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be used. HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code. Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925). SM Appendix 3-57 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 426 HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting – Ridoc I/F). NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that: D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 427 The software performs an unexpected function and the program cannot continue. Software defective, re-boot Software error 2 The software performs an unexpected function. However, unlike SC990, recovery processing allows the program to continue. Software defective, re-boot SM Appendix 3-59 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 428 The number of executed application items on the operation panel reach the maximum limit for the operation panel structure. Too much executed application items Controller Board Mismatch The information on the controller board does not match that of the machine Wrong controller board installed D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 3-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 429 Register processing does not operate for an application within 60 s after the machine power is turned on. No applications start correctly, and all end abnormally. Software bug A RAM or DIMM option necessary for the application is not installed or not installed correctly. SM Appendix 3-61 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 431: Appendix: Service Program Mode Tables

    APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 03/09/2012 Corrected SP 2105 03/09/2012 Corrected SP 2895 01/04/2011...
  • Page 433 001 Tray: Plain 002 Tray: Thick 1 003 Tray: Thick 2 004 By-pass: Plain [–9 to 9/ 0 / 0.1 mm step] 005 By-pass: Thick 1 006 By-pass: Thick 2 007 Duplex: Plain 008 Duplex: Thick 1 SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 434 004 Tray 2, 3, 4: Plain 005 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick1 006 Tray 2, 3, 4: Thick2 007 By-pass: Plain 008 By-pass: Thick 1 [-9 to 5 / -2 /1 mm step] 009 By-pass: Thick 2 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 435 You must switch SP1103-1 ON before you set the fusing interval with SP1103-2. 001 Enable Fusing Idling 0 = Off, 1 = On 002 Interval [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec.] SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 436: System Sp Table-1

    Before changing this setting, make sure that the machine is connected to a power supply not shared by other electrical equipment. Selecting Phase control ("1") could cause the fusing temperature control board to emit low pitched noise D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 437 Sets the reload temperature for the ends of the hot roller. This setting depends on the target temperature. Reload temp. = Target Temp – This SP Setting Do not set a temperature that is higher than the setting for SP1105 2 (Roller Ends: Trays) SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 438 019 Roller Center: Special 2 C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 150 / 1 deg] C1b/C1.5b: [100 to 170 / 145 / 1 deg] 020 Roller Ends: Special 2 C1c/C1.5c: [100 to 170 / 155 / 1 deg] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 439 033 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 1 [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg] 034 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thick 2 035 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thick 2 036 Feed Wait: Center Minus: Thin 037 Feed Wait: Ends Minus: Thin SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 440 [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 sec] Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001. Pre-Idling Time [5 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec] Specifies the time that the paper stops in the fusing unit for measuring the nip. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 SM Appendix...
  • Page 441 002 Regist: 154: Thick 1 [-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.05 %] 003 Regist: 180: Plain 004 Regist: 230: Plain 005 Feed: 90: Thick 2 [-2 to 2 / -0.4 / 0.05 %] 006 Feed: 154: Thick 1 SM Appendix D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 442 023 Inverter_CCW: 180: Plain [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %] 024 Inverter_CCW: 230: Plain 025 Exit_CW: 90: Thick 2 026 Exit_CW: 154: Thick 1 027 Exit_CW: 180: Plain 028 Exit_CW: 230: Plain 029 Bridge: 90: Thick 2 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-10 SM Appendix...
  • Page 443 036 OpcMot:230 037 TransferMot:90 038 TransferMot:154 [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.01 %] 039 TransferMot:180 040 TransferMot:230 041 FusingMot:90 042 FusingMot:154 043 FusingMot:180 044 FusingMot:230 045 DevPuddleMot [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %] SM Appendix 4-11 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 444 Web Motor Setting: Web End [0 to 60 / 27 / 1 sec] Adjusts the motor rotation time after the web end. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-12 SM Appendix...
  • Page 445 003 Feed Solenoid OFF: Plain 004 Feed Solenoid OFF: Thick 005 Feed Clutch ON: Plain [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm] 006 Feed Clutch ON: Thick 007 Stop Position before Inverter 008 Stop Position after Inverter SM Appendix 4-13 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 446 021 Shift Motor ON [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm] 1908 Paper Bank Feed Timing Adj (DFU) 001 Feed Clutch ON: Plain [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm] 002 Feed Clutch ON: Thick D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-14 SM Appendix...
  • Page 447 017 Waiting Time: Low: M-Thick [0 to 180 / 60 / 1 sec] 018 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 1 The machine determines whether the CPM down mode is activated or not 019 Waiting Time: Low: Thick 2 SM Appendix 4-15 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 448 C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm] Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode. 037 CPM: Low: M-Thick C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm] C1c/C1.5c: [20 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-16 SM Appendix...
  • Page 449 [5 to 15 / 15 / 5 cpm] Adjusts the CPM in the CPM down mode. 045 CPM: Medium: Thin C1b/C1.5b: [20 to 35 / 35 / 5 cpm] C1c/C1.5c: [30 to 45 / 45 / 5 cpm] SM Appendix 4-17 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 450 Adjusts the On-Off interval of the transfer belt contact motor. ("Off" means that the transfer belt is away from the drum.) Tray Lock at Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0= OFF, 1= ON 1950 Not used D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-18 SM Appendix...

  • Page 451: System Sp Table-2

    [1000 to 2000 / 1500 / 10 vol] Adjusts the lower limit value for charge roller voltage correction. Bias Adjustment 2 [1000 to 2000 / 2000 / 10 vol] Adjusts the upper limit value for charge roller voltage correction. SM Appendix 4-19 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 452 010 Duplex Trail.: L Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1mm] 011 Duplex Trail.: M Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1mm] 012 Duplex Trail.: S Size: Thick [0 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1mm] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-20 SM Appendix...
  • Page 453 2105* Adjusts the LD power for each mode. Each LD power setting is decided by the process control. ⇒ 001 LD1: Copy [–50 to 79 / -24 (D009/D011), 5 (D012/D013/D091/D092) /1 ] 002 LD2: Copy ⇒ 003 LD1: Printer/Fax [–50 to 79 / -44 (D009/D011),...
  • Page 454 Adjusts the development bias for copying. Use as a temporary measure to correct faint copies from an aging drum. ID Sensor Pattern [200 to 700 / 400 / 10V ] Adjusts the development bias for the ID sensor pattern for VSP D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-22 SM Appendix...
  • Page 455 The toner supply rate depends on the amount of toner in the toner bottle. This change is corrected using this coefficient. This SP can be used to check the toner supply condition. The lower the value of K, the lower the toner density SM Appendix 4-23 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 456 Vt(10)) is detected 90 times after toner near end. If "1" is selected, the machine stops printing when the TD sensor output drops below the prescribed level. Select 1 or 2 if the customer normally makes copies of very high density. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-24 SM Appendix...
  • Page 457 [0 to 5 / 4 / 0.01] Displays the average of the most recent TD sensor outputs (from the previous 10 copies). Rate of Change [-10000 to 10000 / 0 / 1] Displays the rate of change in the TD sensor output. SM Appendix 4-25 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 458 [10 to 100 / 20 / 1 A ] Adjusts the transfer current for copying at leading edge the first side of the paper. Increase the current to separate the paper from the drum properly in high humidity and high temperature conditions. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-26 SM Appendix...
  • Page 459 Use this SP when an image problem (e.g., insufficient toner transfer) occurs with a small width paper. If the paper width is smaller than this value, the transfer current will be multiplied by the factor in SP2-309-3 (paper tray) or SP2-309-5 (by-pass). SM Appendix 4-27 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 460 010 By-pass: Thick 1 (delta) 011 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (alpha) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ] 012 Paper Tray: Thick 2 (beta) 013 By-pass: Thick 2 (gamma) [1 to 3 / 1.5 / 0.1 ] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-28 SM Appendix...
  • Page 461 031 Paper Tray: Special 3 (alpha) [1 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 ] 032 Paper Tray: Special 3 (beta) 033 By-pass: Special 3 (gamma) [1 to 3 / 1.1 / 0.1 ] 034 By-pass: Special 3 (delta) SM Appendix 4-29 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 462 [1 to 5 / 1 / 0.01vol ] Adjusts the minimum value for SP2802 1. Process Setting ⇒ 2805* Performs the developer initialization. Press "Execute" to start. This SP should be performed after doing SP2801 at machine installation. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-30 SM Appendix...
  • Page 463 Use this SP when an image problem (such as white spots at the center of black dots or breaks in thin black lines) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. SM Appendix 4-31 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 464 Use this SP when an image problem (see 2-914-1) occurs when paper with a small width is fed from the by-pass feed tray. Toner Overflow Sensor [0 = No, 1= Yes] 2960* Selects whether or not the toner overflow sensor is activated. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-32 SM Appendix...
  • Page 465 A larger value allows a wider range of halftones at the pale end of the scale. If the image contains pale areas with fuzzy borders surrounded by dark areas, reduce this value to make the borders clearer. SM Appendix 4-33 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 466 The time may need to be shorter for customers who run especially large print jobs (working at night, for example) to ensure earlier warning of the toner near end condition so toner out does not interrupt a long job. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-34 SM Appendix...
  • Page 467 3: Toner end counter < 90 and Vt (10) > (Vref + 0.3) when 002 End SP2213-001 is set to "0". 4: When SP2213-001 is set to "2" 5: Vsp > 0.9 when SP2213-001 is set to "2" 6: Special order 7 to 10: Not used SM Appendix 4-35 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 468 The strength in the polarity of the carrier in the toner will eventually decrease and cause lower charge output. Setting the charge output to increase after a specified number of copies can compensate for this effect. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-36 SM Appendix...

  • Page 469: System Sp Table-3

    If the P sensor does not detect the bare area of the drum, "VSP = 0.0 V/VSG =0.0 V" is displayed and an SC code is generated. 001 Vsg [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1] 002 Vsp [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.1] SM Appendix 4-37 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 470 Sets the number of additional execution times of the 1st cleaning mode. [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 times] 2nd Cleaning: Interval Sets the threshold for the 2nd cleaning mode. "Cleaning A" is done twice. [6 to 49 / 30 / 1 sheets] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-38 SM Appendix...
  • Page 471 All fans remain on during cleaning and then switch off 60sec after the cleaning cycle ends. Cleaning Priority Setting [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheets] 0: Priority to printing (No job interruption) 1: Priority to cleaning (Job interruption) SM Appendix 4-39 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 472: System Sp Table-4

    4011* MS: [–4.2 to 4.2 / 0 / 0.1 mm ] As you enter negative values, the image will disappear at the left, and as you enter positive values, the image will appear at the left. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-40 SM Appendix...
  • Page 473 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0=Off, 1=On 002 Lamp: OFF 4014 Scanner Free Run 001 HP Detection Enable Scanner free run with HP sensor check. 002 HP Detection Disable Scanner free run without HP sensor check. SM Appendix 4-41 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 474 Correction Level Selects the level of the sub scan line correction when using the ARDF. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1: Weakest, 2: Weak, 3: Strong, 4: Strongest D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-42 SM Appendix...
  • Page 475 [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm] 003 Book: Left 004 Book: Right 005 ADF: Leading Edge [0 to 3 / 2 / 0.1 mm] 007 ADF: Right [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm] SM Appendix 4-43 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 476 25: Gray Scale 18 text 11: Gray patch 16 (2) 26: Gray Scale 18 photo 12: Gray patch 64 27: Gray Scale 256 text 13: Grid pattern (2) 28: Gray Scale 256 photo 14: Color patch K D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-44 SM Appendix...
  • Page 477 (platen, ADF). CS: [0 to 1020 / 364 / 4 digit] 001 Lower Limit MS: [0 to 1020 / 408 / 4 digit] 002 Background Level [512 to 1535 / 972 / 1 digit] SM Appendix 4-45 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 478 Specifies the printer vector correction value. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] 025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B 029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B 033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B 037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B 041-040 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B 045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-46 SM Appendix...
  • Page 479 Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less contrast. Ind. Dot Erase: 0(x1), 1-7(High) [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower -009 for weaker effect. 0: Not activated SM Appendix 4-47 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 480 [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots. Set higher for stronger effect, lower -009 for weaker effect. 0: Not activated SBU Version 4600 Displays the ID of the SBU. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-48 SM Appendix...
  • Page 481 4607 White Balance Target: G This value is the target value of green for the white level adjustment. CS: [1023 to 0 / 784 / 1 digit] MS: [1023 to 1 / 876 / 1 digit] SM Appendix 4-49 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 482 SBU (black and white printing speed). Latest: RO B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-50 SM Appendix...
  • Page 483 Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (color printing speed). Latest: GE Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit] Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color printing speed). SM Appendix 4-51 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 484 SBU (black and white printing speed). Latest: GO B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit] Displays the black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-52 SM Appendix...
  • Page 485 SBU (black and white printing speed). Latest: BO B/W [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit] Displays the black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). SM Appendix 4-53 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 486 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. SP4629-003 and -004 are used only for the color scanner model. 001 Latest: GE Color 002 Latest: GO Color [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit] 003 Latest: GE B/W 004 Latest: GO B/W D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-54 SM Appendix...
  • Page 487 003 Loop Count (2nd): Color 004 Loop Count (2nd): B/W SBU: White Level Loop 4641 Displays the white level adjustment time for each mode. 001 Loop Count: Color [0 to 20 / 0 / 1 ] 002 Loop Count: B/W SM Appendix 4-55 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 488 Displays the result of the SBU connection check. 4647 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0: OK, 1: SBU connection check failure Power-On If the SBU connection check fails, SC144-001, -002 or -003 occurs. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-56 SM Appendix...
  • Page 489 SBU (black and white printing speed). Previous: RO B/W [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). SM Appendix 4-57 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 490 SBU (color printing speed). Previous: GE Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even green signal in the SBU (color printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-58 SM Appendix...
  • Page 491 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal SM Appendix 4-59 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 492 SBU (black and white printing speed). Previous: BO B/W [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-60 SM Appendix...
  • Page 493 Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. SP4659-003 and -004 are used only for the color scanner model. 001 Previous: GE Color 002 Previous: GO Color [ 0 255 / 64 / 1 digit] 003 Previous: GE B/W 004 Previous: GO B/W SM Appendix 4-61 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 494 SBU (color printing speed). Before Previous: RO Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (color printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-62 SM Appendix...
  • Page 495 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd red signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal SM Appendix 4-63 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 496 SBU (black and white printing speed). Before Previous: GO B/W [0 to 255 / 112 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (rough adjustment) for the odd green signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-64 SM Appendix...
  • Page 497 SBU (color printing speed). Before Previous: BE Color [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the even blue signal in the SBU (color printing speed). SM Appendix 4-65 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 498 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 digit ] Displays the previous 2nd black offset value (fine adjustment) for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-66 SM Appendix...
  • Page 499 Factory Setting: RO B/W [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ] Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). SM Appendix 4-67 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 500 Factory Setting: GE Color [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ] Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the even green signal in the SBU (color printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-68 SM Appendix...
  • Page 501 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ] Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal SM Appendix 4-69 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 502 Factory Setting: BO B/W [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit ] Displays the factory setting values of the 2nd black offset level rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the SBU (black and white printing speed). D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-70 SM Appendix...
  • Page 503 SP4677-003 and -004 are used only for the color scanner model. 001 Factory Setting: RE Color 002 Factory Setting:: RO Color [ 0 255 / 0 / 1 digit] 003 Factory Setting: RE B/W 004 Factory Setting: RO B/W SM Appendix 4-71 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 504 Adjusts the gray balance of the red signal for each scanning mode. 001 R Book Scan CS: [-512 to 511 / -32 / 1 digit ] MS: [-512 to 511 / 25 / 1 digit ] 002 R DF Scan D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-72 SM Appendix...
  • Page 505 [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 % ] White Peak Level 4690 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. 001 RE 002 RO [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ] 003 RE: BK 004 RO: BK SM Appendix 4-73 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 506 003 BE: BK 004 BO: BK Black Peak Level 4693 Displays the peak level of the black level scanning. 001 RE 002 RO [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit ] 003 RE: BK 004 RO: BK D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-74 SM Appendix...
  • Page 507 002 Lamp OFF Press "OFF" to stop this free run. Otherwise, the free run continues. 4803* Home Position Adjustment (DFU) [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1 mm ] 001 Adjusts the home position of the exposure lamp. SM Appendix 4-75 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 508 001 Independent Dot Erase: Text/Photo [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 ] 002 Independent Dot Erase: Generation Copy Changes the parameters for dithering. 4905* Dither Selection [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 ] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-76 SM Appendix...
  • Page 509 4918 Manual Gamma Adjustment (DFU) Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for black in Photo mode or Letter mode. Touch [Change] to open the printer gamma screen. Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen. SM Appendix 4-77 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 510 RGB images done by Digital AE RGB images done by Vertical line correction RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction RGB image done by Filtering correction RGB images done by Full color ADS RGB image done by Color correction D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-78 SM Appendix...
  • Page 511 Text/Photo Detection Level Adj. Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF. 4994* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Text priority High Compression PDF Setting 1: Normal 2: Photo priority SM Appendix 4-79 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 512: System Sp Table-5

    [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed Display IP Address Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD. 5055* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: OFF, 1: ON D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-80 SM Appendix...
  • Page 513 A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively. Non-Std. Paper Sel. Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for each tray (Tray 1 to 4) 5112* [0 or 1/ 1 / -] 0: OFF 1: ON SM Appendix 4-81 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 514 3: Expansion Device 3 5114* Optional Counter I/F MF Key Card Extension Use this SP and change the setting to "1" only when the "5" (MF Key Card) is selected with SP5113-001. [0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning accounting)] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-82 SM Appendix...
  • Page 515 0: Feed, 1: Exit F Size Original Setting Selects F size original setting. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 step] 5126* 0: 8 1/2 x 13 (Foolscap) 1: 8 1/4 x 13 (Folio) 2: 8 x 13 (F) SM Appendix 4-83 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 516 With this SP selected on, paper jams are not detected in the paper path. App. Switch Method Determines whether the application screen is switched with a hardware 5162* switch or software switch. 0: Soft Key Set 1: Hard Key Set D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-84 SM Appendix...
  • Page 517 003 Tray 1: 3 0: B4, 1: LG 004 Tray 1: 4 0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF 005 Tray 2: 1 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF 006 Tray 2: 2 0: A3, 1: DLT SM Appendix 4-85 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 518 5186* set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] Copy Nv Version 5188* Displays the NV version on the controller. Limitless SW 5195* D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-86 SM Appendix...
  • Page 519 The setting is GMT expressed in minutes. [–1440 to 1440 / - / 1 min.] Japan: +540 (Tokyo) NA: -300 (NY) EU: +60 (Paris) CH: +480 (Peking) TW: +480 (Taipei) AS: +480 (Hong Kong) KO: +540 (Korea) SM Appendix 4-87 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 520 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step] For example: 3500010 The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March. The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1". D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-88 SM Appendix...
  • Page 521 Selects the log out type for the extend authentication device. 162 Extend Certification Detail Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card 0: Not allowed (default) 1: Allowed 200 SDK1 Unique ID "SDK" is the "Software Development SM Appendix 4-89 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 522 00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds, 10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds User Code Count Clear 5404 Clears the counts of the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine. Press [Execute] to clear. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-90 SM Appendix...
  • Page 523 Sets the interval of the retry for accessing the local address book account after the lockout function has been executed. This setting is enabled only if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (ON). 005 Counter Clear Time Not Used SM Appendix 4-91 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 524 Sets the number of users for the access exclusion and password attack detection function. Access Password Num [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 ] Sets the number of passwords for the access exclusion and password attack detection function. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-92 SM Appendix...
  • Page 525 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy application. [0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF 011 Document Server Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server. SM Appendix 4-93 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 526 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 0: OFF, 1: ON [Default] 002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-94 SM Appendix...
  • Page 527 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not included). [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 step] 5504* 0: Zero (Off) 1: Low (2.5K jams) 2: Medium (3K jams) 3: High (6K jams) SM Appendix 4-95 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 528 128 Interval: Others The "Paper Supply Call Level: nn" SPs specify the paper control call interval for the referenced paper sizes. (DFU) 132 Interval: A3 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 Step] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-96 SM Appendix...
  • Page 529 Count [2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time] Sets the length of time the remains opens 013 Door Open: Time Length to determine when to initiate a call. [3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute] SM Appendix 4-97 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 530 007 Machine Information Notice 008 Alarm Notice [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] 009 Non Genuine Toner Alarm 0: OFF 1: ON 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call 011 Supply Management Report Call 012 Jam/Door Open Call D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-98 SM Appendix...
  • Page 531 005 MCS documents. (MCS: Memory Control Service) 006 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings. Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX 007 Fax application settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer. SM Appendix 4-99 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 532 009 Scanner application scanner SP modes. Deletes the Netfile (NFA) management files and thumbnails, and initializes the Job login ID. Service/Network Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document server application using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-100 SM Appendix...
  • Page 533 Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) 018 SRM Memory Clear settings. 019 LCS Clear Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings. 020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings. 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings. SM Appendix 4-101 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 534 This SP presents the screen used to enter the 11-digit number of the 5811* machine. The allowed entries are "A" to "Z" and "0" to "9". The setting is done at the factory, and should not be changed in the field. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-102 SM Appendix...
  • Page 535 Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Start of the service 1: End of the service NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”. SM Appendix 4-103 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 536 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG. [1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step] Port 80 Enable Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method. [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-104 SM Appendix...
  • Page 537 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection Cert. Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification. Use Proxy This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center. SM Appendix 4-105 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 538 This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password. The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-106 SM Appendix...
  • Page 539 The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored. The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event. SM Appendix 4-107 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 540 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-108 SM Appendix...
  • Page 541 If the 085 Firm Up User Check option to confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL. SM Appendix 4-109 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 542 @Remote certification. CN = the following 30 092 CERT: Issuer bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no @Remote certification exists. Displays the start time of the period for which the 093 CERT: Valid Start current @Remote certification is enabled. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-110 SM Appendix...
  • Page 543 Not used Selection Dial/Push Not used Outside Line/Outgoing Number Not used Dial Up User Name Not used Dial Up Password Not used Local Phone Number Not used Connection Timing Adjustment: Incoming Not used Access Point Not used SM Appendix 4-111 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 544 4: The @Remote module has not started. Allows entry of the request number needed for the 202 Letter Number Embedded RCG Gate. Executes the confirmation request to the @Remote 203 Confirm Execute Gateway. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-112 SM Appendix...
  • Page 545 0: Succeeded 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error 9: Registration executing SM Appendix 4-113 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 546 A confirmation request was made after -12006 the confirmation had been already completed. The request number used at registration -12007 was different from the one used at confirmation. Update certification failed because -12008 mainframe was in use. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-114 SM Appendix...
  • Page 547 Incorrect request number format Releases the machine from its Embedded RCG Gate setup. 209 Instl Clear NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after this setting has been changed. 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log. SM Appendix 4-115 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 548 Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate) destination for call 002 RCG IP Address processing at the remote service center. [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / - / 1] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-116 SM Appendix...
  • Page 549 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0:Off, 1: On Disables and enables the ECP feature (1284 Mode) for data transfer. 052 ECP (Centro) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled SM Appendix 4-117 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 550 Telnet port is closed. (0:OFF 1:ON) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Disables or enables the Web operation. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] (0:OFF 1:ON) 0: Disable, 1: Enable D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-118 SM Appendix...
  • Page 551 Active IPv6 Stateless (802.11b) in the format: Address 2 "Stateless Address" + "Prefix Length" The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits Active IPv6 Stateless configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each. Address 3 SM Appendix 4-119 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 552 However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the following rules. Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the following characters: 0123456789abcdefABCDEF A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character. fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-120 SM Appendix...
  • Page 553 Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Web shopping link visible Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH on the top page and link page of the web system. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Not display, 1:Display...
  • Page 554 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the execution ends, cycle the machine off and on. 001 HDD Formatting (All) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) 005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-122 SM Appendix...
  • Page 555 [0 to 6 / 0 / 1] 072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3 [0 to 6 / 0 / 1] 073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0:1, 1:1/2, 2:1/3, 3:1/4, 6:2/3 SM Appendix 4-123 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 556 [5 to 95 / 50 / 1] Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server with the MLB, with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional File Format Converter (MLB: Media Link Board) is installed. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-124 SM Appendix...
  • Page 557 0 x 0A - 6M Fix WEP Key Select Selects the WEP key. Bit 1 and 0 00: Key1, 01: Key2 (Reserved), 10: Key3 (Reserved), 11: Key4(Reserved) This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. SM Appendix 4-125 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 558 This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. WPA Debug Lvl Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application. [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-126 SM Appendix...
  • Page 559 Inquiry button on the User Tools screen. 001 Toner Name Setting: Black 007 Org Stamp 011 StapleStd1 012 StapleStd2 Standard Staples for B804/B805 013 StapleStd3 Standard Staples for B408 014 StapleStd4 021 StapleBind1 022 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples for B804 023 StapleBind3 SM Appendix 4-127 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 560 Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the document 001 Setting 1 server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Adjusts the debug program mode setting. Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting 002 Setting 2 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second 1: Minute/Second/Msec. 0 to 6: Not used D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-128 SM Appendix...
  • Page 561 [0 x 01 or 0 x 04 / 0 x 04 /-] 0 x 01 [Full Speed], 0 x 04 [Auto Change] Vendor ID Sets the vendor ID: Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company [0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] (DFU) Product ID Sets the product ID.
  • Page 562 Lets you change the model of the delivery server that is registered by the I/O device. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 step] 0: Unknown 1: SG1 Provided 2: SG1 Package 3: SG2 Provided 4: SG2 Package D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-130 SM Appendix...
  • Page 563 018 Server URL Path (Secondary) 019 Capture Server Port Number 020 Capture Server URL Path [1 to 65535 / 80 /1] Capture Server URL Path These SPs (5845-013/014/015/016/017/018/019/020/021) listed above are used for the scan router program. SM Appendix 4-131 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 564 (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 step] 0: No retries D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-132 SM Appendix...
  • Page 565 SP5846-051 before you execute this SP. After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is deleted from the flash ROM. If the operation fails, the data is not erased from the flash ROM. SM Appendix 4-133 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 566 Clears all of the address information from the local address book of a machine managed with UCS. Initialize Delivery Addr Book Push [Execute] to delete all items (this does not include user codes) in the delivery address book that is controlled by UCS. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-134 SM Appendix...
  • Page 567 This feature does not work if the card is write-protected. Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing. SM Appendix 4-135 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 568 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step] This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-136 SM Appendix...
  • Page 569 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1step] This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. SM Appendix 4-137 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 570 Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed. [5 to 95 / 50 / 1step] 5848* Web Service D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-138 SM Appendix...
  • Page 571 Setting: Log Type: Job 1 No information is available at this time. Setting: Log Type: Job 2 No information is available at this time. Setting: Log Type: Access No information is available at this time. 213 Setting: Primary Srv SM Appendix 4-139 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 572 1: ON (Print) When the total number of pages that are made reaches this value, the current date becomes the 'official' 003 Total Counter installation date for this machine. [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-140 SM Appendix...
  • Page 573 1284) during a remote ROM update. This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on. Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 step] 0: Not allowed 1: Allowed SM Appendix 4-141 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 574 SD Card. Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key specified. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-142 SM Appendix...
  • Page 575 Make HDD Debug This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. Make SD Debug This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. SM Appendix 4-143 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 576 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for 005 Key 5 functions that use common memory on the controller board. 006 Key 6 [-9999999 to 9999999 / - / 1] 007 Key 7 008 Key 8 009 Key 9 010 Key 10 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-144 SM Appendix...
  • Page 577 Select the authentication method for SMPT. Bit 0: LOGIN Bit 1: PLAIN Bit 2: CRAM_MD5 Bit 3: DIGEST_MD5 Bit 4 to Bit 7: Not Used This SP is activated only when SMTP authentication is enabled by UP mode. SM Appendix 4-145 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 578 "SD Card Appli Move" in the chapter "System Maintenance (Main Chapters). 001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another. 002 Undo Exec This is an undo function. It cancels the previous execution. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-146 SM Appendix...
  • Page 579 Press [Execute] to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier. For more, see 001 Data Overwrite Security "DataOverwriteSecurity Unit" in the chapter "Installation". 002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit. Fixed Phase Block Erasing 5881 Detects the Fixed phrase. SM Appendix 4-147 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 580 [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Signature for each e-mail 1: Signature for all e-mails 2: No signature Selects whether the signature is added to the scanned documents with the WIM when they are transmitted by an e-mail. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-148 SM Appendix...
  • Page 581 Personal Information Protect Selects the protection level for logs. 5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: No authentication, No protection for logs 1: No authentication, Protected logs (only an administrator can see the logs) SM Appendix 4-149 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 582 After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time. When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times. [0 to 23 / - / 1 step] FA 0: RICOH Aficio MP 4000B 12: LANIER MP 4000B/LD040B 1: RICOH Aficio MP 4000...
  • Page 583 SP is set to "2". Even though you can change the initial settings of those network applications, the settings do not work [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 002 On Board USB 0: Disable, 1: Enable SM Appendix 4-151 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 584 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default Prints out the SMC sheets. 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-152 SM Appendix...

  • Page 585: System Sp Table-6

    004 Original Width Sensor 1 0: Paper not detected 005 Original Width Sensor 2 1: Paper detected 006 Original Width Sensor 3 007 Original Width Sensor 4 008 Original Width Sensor 5 009 Original Set Sensor SM Appendix 4-153 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 586 0: Paper not detected 017 Inverter Sensor 1: Paper detected 0: HP (Pick-up roller: Up) 018 Pick-up HP Sensor 1: Not HP (Pick-up roller: Down) 0: HP (Stopper: UP) 019 Original Stopper HP Sensor 1: Not HP (Stopper: Down) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-154 SM Appendix...
  • Page 587 001 Free Run: Simplex 002 Free Run: Duplex 003 Free Run: Stamp ADF Stamp Position [–5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 mm step] Adjustment 6010* Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals. SM Appendix 4-155 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 588 267 x 195 mm Sheet Through Magnification [–5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1% step] 6017* Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for ADF mode. Use the key to toggle between + and - before entering the value D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-156 SM Appendix...
  • Page 589 Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction. (For B804/B805) 001 2-Hole: DOM (Japan) 002 3-Hole: NA 003 4-Hole: EU [-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.4 mm] 004 4-Hole: SCAN 005 2-Hole: NA 006 1-Hole: DOM (Japan) SM Appendix 4-157 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 590 Skew Correction Control 6131* Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. (For B804/B805) 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 mm] 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-158 SM Appendix...
  • Page 591 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm] 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 12" x 18" 012 Other SM Appendix 4-159 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 592 003 A4 SEF + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease. - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12" x 18" 009 Other D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-160 SM Appendix...
  • Page 593 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12" x 18" 009 Other Book Fold Repeat 6136* Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804. [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step] SM Appendix 4-161 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 594 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B804/B805) ( p.4-236 "Input Check") FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check 6144 Display the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet) finisher. (B408) ( p.4-249 "Output Check") D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-162 SM Appendix...
  • Page 595 [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheets step] This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. 6149* You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper. SM Appendix 4-163 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 596 0= OFF, 1= ON Enables or disables the shading adjustment for DF mode. 002 Shading Interval: A [0 to 60 / 3 / 1 sec] DFU 003 Shading Interval: B [0 to 120 / 60 / 1 ] DFU D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-164 SM Appendix...

  • Page 597: System Sp Table-7

    007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 Total Paper Jam Counter 7502* Displays the total number of paper jams. Total Original Jam Counter 7503* Displays the total number of original jams. SM Appendix 4-165 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 598 12 Vertical Transport 2: On 14 Bank: Transport Sn 2: On 17 Registration: On 19 Fusing Exit: On 20 Paper Exit: On 21 Bridge Exit On 22 Bridge Transport: On 24 Junction Gate Sensor: On 25 Duplex Exit: On D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-166 SM Appendix...
  • Page 599 67 Duplex Entrance: Off (out) 100 Finisher Entrance: KIN 101 Finisher Shift: KIN 102 Finisher Staple: KIN 103 Finisher Exit: KIN 105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN 106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN 107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN SM Appendix 4-167 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 600 A Check-out ("paper lag") paper jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the prescribed time. 1 At Power: On 3 Separation Sensor: On D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-168 SM Appendix...
  • Page 601 006 A5 LEF 014 B5 LEF 038 LT LEF 044 HLT LEF Displays the total number of copy jams by paper size. 132 A3 SEF 133 A4 SEF 134 A5 SEF 141 B4 SEF 142 B5 SEF SM Appendix 4-169 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 602 7507 10 Latest 9 Size Code Size Code Size Code A4 (S) A3 (L) DLT (L) A5 (S) A4 (L) LG (L) B5 (S) A5 (L) LT (L) LT (S) B4 (L) HLT (L) HLT (S) B5 (L) Others D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-170 SM Appendix...
  • Page 603 A5 (S) A4 (L) LG (L) B5 (S) A5 (L) LT (L) LT (S) B4 (L) HLT (L) HLT (S) B5 (L) Others 7801 ROM No./Firmware Version 255 Displays the ROM number and firmware version numbers. SM Appendix 4-171 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 604 [0 255 / 0 / 1 %] Displays the transfer unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM). Rotation(%):Fuser [0 255 / 0 / 1 %] Displays the fuser unit (%) rotation counter (distance/PM). 011 Rotation(%):Web [0 255 / 0 / 1 %] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-172 SM Appendix...
  • Page 605 Clear Transfer Resets the PM counter of the transfer unit. Clear Fuser Resets the PM counter of the fuser unit. Clear Web Reset the PM counter of the web unit. Clear All Clear Resets all PM counter SM Appendix 4-173 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 606 [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ] Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the OPC. Rotation: Charge Roller [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ] Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the charge roller. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-174 SM Appendix...
  • Page 607 [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ] Displays the parts counter (rotations) of the strippers. Page(%): Web [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %] Displays the parts counter (rotations/PM %) of the cleaning web. SM Appendix 4-175 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 608 Resets the parts counter of the cleaning roller. Resets the parts counter of the cleaning web. Thermistor Resets the parts counter of the thermistors. Stripper Resets the parts counter of the strippers. All Clear Resets all parts counters. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-176 SM Appendix...
  • Page 609 Use the keys in the display on the touch-panel to scroll through all the information. If no errors have occurred, you will see the "No Error" message on the screen. Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. SM Appendix 4-177 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 610 Displays the replacement counter of the cleaning web. Zero Cross [0 to 255 / 60 / 1 ] 7856* 1 Stores and displays the detected zero cross frequency of the main ac power supply from the wall socket. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-178 SM Appendix...
  • Page 611 [0 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm ] Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous fusing unit. Rotation(%):PCD [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 mm] Displays the previous counter (rotations/PM %) of the previous PCD SM Appendix 4-179 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 612 Displays the replacement date of the transfer unit. Fuser [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] Displays the replacement date of the fusing unit. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ] Displays the replacement date of the web unit. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-180 SM Appendix...
  • Page 613 [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %] Displays the remaining counter (%) of the fusing unit. Web (%) [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 %] Displays the remaining counter (%) of the cleaning web. SM Appendix 4-181 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 614 [0 to 999999999 / 54880000 / 1 mm] Sets the PM yield of the fusing unit (Rotations). Web (%) [0 to 255 / 92 / 1 %] Sets the PM yield (%) of the web unit. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-182 SM Appendix...
  • Page 615 Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 27<=T<=32 32<T [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1 mm] Displays the PCU rotation distance of the environment: 32<T Env Log Clear 7954 Resets the environment logs (SP7953). SM Appendix 4-183 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 616: System Sp Table-8

    Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an 'application'). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-184 SM Appendix...
  • Page 617 LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand. Key for Abbreviations SM Appendix 4-185 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 618 Duplex, printing on both sides Emul Emulation Full Color Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.) Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-186 SM Appendix...
  • Page 619 Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON. PJob Print Jobs Paper SM Appendix 4-187 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 620 SMC report. Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send, Transmission Yellow, Magenta, Cyan YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, BlacK All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801-1 Memory All Clear. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-188 SM Appendix...
  • Page 621 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters both increment. When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments. When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document SM Appendix 4-189 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 622 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments. When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments. When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-190 SM Appendix...
  • Page 623 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments. When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments. SM Appendix 4-191 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 624 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments. When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-192 SM Appendix...
  • Page 625 Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time. P:FIN Jobs [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is specified by the application. SM Appendix 4-193 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 626 (Z-fold). Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for 806x 6 Punch a print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8064 6.) 806x 7 Other Reserved. Not used. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-194 SM Appendix...
  • Page 627 (Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job. 807x 1 1 Page 807x 8 21to50 Pages 807x 2 2 Pages 807x 9 51to100 Pages 807x 3 3 Pages 807x 10 101to300 Pages SM Appendix 4-195 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 628 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job (SP 8072). When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is counted. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-196 SM Appendix...
  • Page 629 If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (812x) also increments. The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent. SM Appendix 4-197 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 630 001 B/W Black TX 002 Color Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 003 ACS Color TX / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-198 SM Appendix...
  • Page 631 Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 003 ACS Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr 8145 These SPs count the number of jobs scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. SM Appendix 4-199 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 632 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC. 001 B/W Black Deliv 002 Color Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 003 ACS Color Deliv / Only for D011, D013, D091 or D092 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-200 SM Appendix...
  • Page 633 C:Total Scan PGS These SPs count the pages scanned by each 8193 F:Total Scan PGS application that uses the scanner to scan images. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8195 S:Total Scan PGS 8196 L:Total Scan PGS SM Appendix 4-201 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 634 These SP codes count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax 8205 transmission are not counted. Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-202 SM Appendix...
  • Page 635 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6. If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6. SM Appendix 4-203 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 636 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1. If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-204 SM Appendix...
  • Page 637 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is enabled. In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3. SM Appendix 4-205 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 638 File button from within the Copy mode screen 8241 8242 8243 8245 8246 824x 1: Text 824x 2: Text/Photo 824x 3: Photo 824x 4: GenCopy, Pale 824x 5: Map 824x 6: Normal/Detail 824x 7: Fine/Super Fine 824x 8: Binary D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-206 SM Appendix...
  • Page 639 TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts. SM Appendix 4-207 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 640 Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-208 SM Appendix...
  • Page 641 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by 8315 applications that can specify resolution settings. Note: At the present time, 8311 and 8315 perform identical counts. 831x 1 1200dpi to 831x 2 600dpito1199dpi 831x 3 400dpito599dpi 831x 4 200dpito399dpi SM Appendix 4-209 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 642 Reports printed to confirm counts. All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) Test prints for machine image adjustment. Error notification reports. Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-210 SM Appendix...
  • Page 643 Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count. This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last pages 8411 Prints/Duplex printed only on one side are not counted. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] SM Appendix 4-211 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 644 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8427 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications 842x 1 Simplex> Duplex 842x 2 Duplex> Duplex 842x 3 Book> Duplex D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-212 SM Appendix...
  • Page 645 ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption. Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page. Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes: SM Appendix 4-213 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 646 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application. P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8434 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-214 SM Appendix...
  • Page 647 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application. P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application. SM Appendix 4-215 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 648 844x 2 844x 3 844x 4 844x 5 844x 6 844x 7 844x 8 844x 9 844x 10 Full Bleed 844x 254 Other (Standard) 844x 255 Other (Custom) These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-216 SM Appendix...
  • Page 649 However, these counts are based on output timing. Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page printed on one side counts as 1. SM Appendix 4-217 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 650 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 846x 1 Normal 846x 2 Recycled 846x 3 Special 846x 4 Thick 846x 5 Normal (Back) 846x 6 Thick (Back) 846x 7 846x 8 Other D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-218 SM Appendix...
  • Page 651 These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on. Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] SM Appendix 4-219 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 652 011 PCL XL 012 IPDL-C 013 BM-Links Japan Only 014 Other SP8511 and SP8514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application. Print jobs output to the document server are not counted. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-220 SM Appendix...
  • Page 653 8526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel. 852x 1 Sort 852x 2 Stack 852x 3 Staple 852x 4 Booklet SM Appendix 4-221 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 654 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages 8591 printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:) applications only. 001 A3/DLT 002 Duplex D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-222 SM Appendix...
  • Page 655 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. SM Appendix 4-223 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 656 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for each destination. Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not. Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-224 SM Appendix...
  • Page 657 For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20). SM Appendix 4-225 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 658 Scan Router server. If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are not done. The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-226 SM Appendix...
  • Page 659 When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.) SM Appendix 4-227 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 660 8701 send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12. 001 PSTN-1 002 PSTN-2 003 PSTN-3 004 ISDN (G3,G4) 005 Network D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-228 SM Appendix...
  • Page 661 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8715 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application, counted by the formats listed below. 001 JPEG/JPEG2000 002 TIFF (Multi/Single) 003 PDF 004 Other 005 High Compression PDF SM Appendix 4-229 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 662 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used. The count is done based on the equivalent of 1,000 pages per bottle. This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing 8791 LS Memory Remain documents. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1] D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-230 SM Appendix...
  • Page 663 041 8 to 10%: BK Toner Coverage 11-20% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8861 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners. 001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine. SM Appendix 4-231 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 664 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner. Toner Coverage Count Total [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8921 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color. 001 Coverage (%) BK 011 Coverage (PGS) BK D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-232 SM Appendix...
  • Page 665 Total down time due to SC errors. 007 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing. Total down time due to original jams during 008 OrgJam scanning. 009 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to supply unit end. SM Appendix 4-233 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 666 Program (job settings) feature. [0 to 255 / 0 / 255] Printer application registrations with the 009 Printer Program Program (job settings) feature. Scanner application Scanner registrations with the Program Program (job settings) feature. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-234 SM Appendix...
  • Page 667 010 Fax Print: BW 012 A3/DLT 013 Duplex 015 Coverage: BW (%) 017 Coverage: BW Print Page (%) 101 Transmission Total: Color 102 Transmission Total: BW 103 Fax Transmission 104 Scanner Transmission: Color 105 Scanner Transmission: BW SM Appendix 4-235 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 668: Input Check

    Not set 009 Tray 2: Paper Lift Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit 010 Tray 2: Paper End Sensor No paper Paper remaining Tray 2: See the table 2 following this table. Paper Height Sensor 1 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-236 SM Appendix...
  • Page 669 030 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full 031 Right Cover Open/Close Close Open 032 Duplex Unit Open/Close Open Close 033 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper detected 034 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper detected SM Appendix 4-237 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 670 053 1-Bin Unit Set Not set 054 1-Bin Unit: Paper Set Paper detected No paper detected 056 Dip Switch 057 Cleaning Web End Not end 059 Shift Tray Set Not set 060 Shift Sensor No paper detected Paper detected D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-238 SM Appendix...
  • Page 671 Not HP 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Close Table 1: Paper Height Sensor 0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor) Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2 Full Nearly full Near end Almost empty SM Appendix 4-239 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 672 *3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-001 (Tray 1) or -005 (Tray 2). *4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of SP 5-181-004 (Tray 1) or -008 (Tray 2).. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-240 SM Appendix...
  • Page 673 5.5" x 8.5" SEF A5 SEF 5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF 5.5" x 8.5" SEF A6 SEF *1: When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is "LEF", it considers that the paper size is bracketed size. SM Appendix 4-241 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 674: Aps Original Size Detection

    SP 5126 controls the size that is detected A4 LEF 8.5" x 11" 00000011 B5 LEF 00000010 A4 SEF 11" x 8.5" 00001100 B5 SEF 00000100 5.5" x 8.5", A5 LEF/ SEF 00000000 8.5" x 5.5" D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-242 SM Appendix...

  • Page 675: Options

    013 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP 014 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor Not HP 015 Staple Tray Paper Sensor No paper detected Paper detected 016 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP 017 Skew HP Sensor Not HP SM Appendix 4-243 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 676 No paper detected Paper detected 034 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP 035 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP 036 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP 037 Folder Pass Sensor No paper detected Paper detected D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-244 SM Appendix...
  • Page 677 Not used in the machine 048 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not used in the machine 049 Exit Jogger HP Sensor: Rear Not used in the machine *1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2 SM Appendix 4-245 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 678 Input Check DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type Japan Europe North America North Europe *2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (B804 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet) Finisher". D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-246 SM Appendix...

  • Page 679: 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

    010 Staple READY Detection Staple detected detected Exit Guide Plate HP Not HP (Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor) 012 Shift HP Sensor Not HP Paper Sensor No output tray Output tray (Stack Height Sensor) detected detected SM Appendix 4-247 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 680 Input Check Reading 6139 Description Tray Lower Sensor Lower limit Not lower limit (Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor) Proof Full Sensor Not full Full (Paper Limit Sensor) D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-248 SM Appendix...

  • Page 681: Output Check

    014 Bank: Feed Motor: 300 015 Bank: Feed Motor: 255 016 Bank: Feed Motor: 230 Paper feed motor (Optional paper feed unit) 017 Bank: Feed Motor: 215 018 Bank: Feed Motor: 180 019 Bank: Feed Motor: 154 SM Appendix 4-249 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 682 036 Bank: Pick-up Solenoid 4 037 LCT: Pick-up Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (LCT) 038 Tray Lift Motor 1: Up 039 Tray Lift Motor 1: Down 040 Tray Lift Motor 2: Up 041 Tray Lift Motor 2: Down D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-250 SM Appendix...
  • Page 683 057 Duplex Inverter Motor: Rev: 90 058 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 230 059 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 180 060 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 154 061 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Fwd: 90 062 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 230 063 Duplex/By-pass Motor: Rev: 180 SM Appendix 4-251 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 684 077 OPC Motor: 230 078 OPC Motor: 180 Drum motor 079 OPC Motor: 154 080 OPC Motor: 90 081 Transfer/Development Motor: 230 082 Transfer/Development Motor: 180 083 Transfer/Development Motor: 154 084 Transfer/Development Motor: 90 085 Fusing Motor: 230 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-252 SM Appendix...
  • Page 685 099 1-Bin Junction Gate Solenoid unit) 100 Polygon Motor: 230 101 Polygon Motor: 180 102 Polygon Motor: 154 103 Polygon Motor: 90 104 LD 1 105 LD 2 106 Toner Bottle Motor: Fwd Toner supply motor 107 Quenching Lamp SM Appendix 4-253 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 686 Output Check 108 Charge Bias 109 Development Bias 110 Transfer Belt Voltage 111 ID Sensor LED 115 Cleaning Web Motor Web motor 116 Shift Tray Motor Not used 117 CTL Cooling FAN Controller fan 202 Scanner Lamp D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-254 SM Appendix...

  • Page 687: 1000-Sheet Finisher (B408)

    Staple Motor Stapler Hammer Staple Junction 6144 9 Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid Gate SOL Positioning Roller 6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Solenoid Stack Feed-out 6144 11 Motor 6144 12 Shift Motor Exit Guide Plate 6144 13 Motor SM Appendix 4-255 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 688: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher

    Jogger Fence Motor Stack Feed-out 6145 11 Feed Out Belt Motor Motor Staple Moving 6145 12 Corner Stapler Movement Motor Motor 6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor 6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-256 SM Appendix...
  • Page 689 Saddle Stitch 6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear Staple Motor: Rear 6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor 6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor Drive Roller 6145 26 Positioning Roller Motor Oscillating Motor SM Appendix 4-257 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 690 Punch Moving 6145 28 Punch Movement Motor Motor Punch Registration 6145 29 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor Detection Motor Exit Jogger Motor: 6145 30 Front Exit Jogger Motor: 6145 31 Rear Exit Jogger 6145 32 Release Motor D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-258 SM Appendix...

  • Page 691: Printer Service Table

    Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur. bit 4 0: Disable 1: Enable SD Card Save Mode Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot. bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 SM Appendix 4-259 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 692 Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job. Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly. bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-260 SM Appendix...
  • Page 693 In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A" bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 1001 Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 SM Appendix 4-261 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 694 If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a module called the "GPS Filter". Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-262 SM Appendix...
  • Page 695 1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job. SM Appendix 4-263 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 696 Portrait) based on the content. 1003 Clear setting Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode. 003 Delete Program DFU Print Summary 1004 Touch [Execute] to print the printer summary sheets. D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-264 SM Appendix...
  • Page 697 Displays the version of the controller firmware. Sample/Locked Print This SP disables/enables use of the document server. 1006 [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: Enabled. Document server can be used. 1: Disabled. Document server cannot be used. SM Appendix 4-265 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...

  • Page 698: Scanner Service Table

    [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: Not display, 1: Display Clears or does not clear a user information after a job. 1012 User Info Release [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not clear, 1: Clear D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092 4-266 SM Appendix...
  • Page 699 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 1 Compression Ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ] 2 Compression Ratio (High comp image) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] SM Appendix 4-267 D009/D011/D012/D013/D091/D092...
  • Page 701 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 1000 SHEET FINISHER SR790 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added/Updated/New None...
  • Page 703 1000-SHEET FINISHER B408 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT..........1 1.1 MAIN PCB ....................1 1.2 STAPLER UNIT ....................2 1.3 MOTORS......................3 1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR ..................3 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR ................3 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ......4 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR ............4 1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS ................5 1.4.1 PREPARATION ...................5 1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR ..............6...

  • Page 705: Replacement And Adjustment

    MAIN PCB 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT  CAUTION Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.  : Screws  : Connector ...

  • Page 706: Stapler Unit

    STAPLER UNIT 1.2 STAPLER UNIT 1. Side cover [A] (  x 2) 2. Open exit guide plate [B] 3. Upper side cover [C] (  x 2) B408R102.WMF 4. Front cover support plate [D] (  x 1) 5. Front cover [E] 6.

  • Page 707: Motors

    MOTORS 1.3 MOTORS 1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR 1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Shift motor [A] (  x 2,  x 1) B408R123.WMF 1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR 1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) B408R124.WMF B408...

  • Page 708: Upper Transport Motor And Exit Motor

    MOTORS 1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR 1. Rear cover ( 1.1) 2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4,  x 2) 3. Upper transport motor [B] (  x 4) 4. Exit motor [C] (  x 4) B408R112.WMF 1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1.

  • Page 709: Motors And Sensors

    MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.1 PREPARATION 1. Front cover and inner cover ( 1.2) 2. Upper side cover [A] (  x 2) 3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1) B408R116.WMF 4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2) 5.

  • Page 710: Stack Height Sensor

    MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR 1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] (  x 2. Stack height sensor [B] (  x 1) B408R121.WMF 1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR 1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1) B408R120.WMF B408...

  • Page 711: Lower Tray Lift Motor

    MOTORS AND SENSORS 1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR 1. Lower tray lift motor [A] (  x 2,  x 1) B408R119.WMF 1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR 1. Stack feed-out motor [A] (  x 2,  x 1) B408R122.WMF B408...

  • Page 712: Troubleshooting

    JAM DETECTION 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 JAM DETECTION Mode Content Shift Staple Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on On check within the normal time after the main machine exit sensor turns on Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off Off check within the normal time after it turns on.

  • Page 713: Service Tables

    DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in the table below. SW100 Description Normal operation mode (Default) Packing mode. • Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to zero.

  • Page 714: Detailed Descriptions

    GENERAL LAYOUT 4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT B408D101.WMF 1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler 2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt 3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller 4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller 5. Upper Transport Roller 12.

  • Page 715: Electrical Component Layout

    ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B408D102.WMF B408D103.WMF 1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor 2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid 3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor 4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 5.
  • Page 716 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B408D104.WMF 22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 23. Lower Tray Lift Motor 24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor 25. Stapler Motor 26. Jogger Fence Motor 27. Stack Feed-out Motor 28. Main Board 29. Lower Transport Motor 30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid 31.

  • Page 717: Electrical Component Description

    ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Motors Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport Transport rollers. Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the Transport positioning roller. Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer.
  • Page 718 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Symbol Name Function Index No. Positioning Moves the positioning roller. SOL3 Roller Switches Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit Upper Limit position. Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is Safety opened.

  • Page 719: Drive Layout

    DRIVE LAYOUT 4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT B408D106.WMF B408D105.WMF B408D107.WMF 1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor 2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor 3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor 4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor 5. Exit Guide Plate Motor B408...

  • Page 720: Junction Gates

    JUNCTION GATES 4.5 JUNCTION GATES B408D108.WMF Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B]. These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler junction gate solenoid [D].

  • Page 721: Upper Tray

    UPPER TRAY 4.6 UPPER TRAY B408D109.WMF When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected. B408...

  • Page 722: Lower Tray Up/Down Mechanisms

    LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS 4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS B408D112.WMF The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.

  • Page 723: Paper Shift Mechanism

    PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM 4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM B408D110.WMF In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of copies. The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the shift gear disk [C].

  • Page 724: Jogger Unit Paper Positioning Mechanism

    JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM 4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM B408D113.WMF B408D114.WMF In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when it arrives in the jogger unit. For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C] pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].

  • Page 725: Exit Guide Plate

    EXIT GUIDE PLATE 4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE [B] [C] B408D111.WMF When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A] is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers.

  • Page 726: Stapler Mechanism

    STAPLER MECHANISM 4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM B408D116.WMF The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer. The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at the stapling position.

  • Page 727: Stapler Unit Movement Mechanism

    STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM 4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM B408D117.WMF The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position. If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling position first, then moves to the rear stapling position.

  • Page 728: Paper Feed-Out Mechanism

    PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM 4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM B408D118.WMF After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge reaches this roller.
  • Page 729 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER DF3010 B802 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...
  • Page 731 ARDF DF3010 B802 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS AND TRAY ..................1 1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER..............1 1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY ................. 1 1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS ............3 1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER ................3 1.2.2 FEED BELT..................
  • Page 732 2.2 BASIC OPERATION ................... 23 2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ............23 2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ............25 2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ............26 2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION ............... 27 2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION................28 2.2.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ..........28 2.2.7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION ..........
  • Page 733 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to ...

  • Page 735: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers and Tray 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS AND TRAY 1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER Open the left cover [A]. Front cover [B] ( x 1, hook x 2) Rear cover [C] (x 2, hook x 2) 1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY Open the left cover.
  • Page 736 Covers and Tray Pivot cover [A] (  x 1) Original tray [B] (  x 1,  x 1, x 2) B802...

  • Page 737: Document Feed Components

    Document Feed Components 1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS 1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER Open the left cover. Bushings [A] ( x 1 each) Pick-up roller [B] (gear x 1, one-way gear x 1) 1.2.2 FEED BELT Open the left cover. Front feed unit cover [A] Rear feed unit cover [B] (hook x 2) B802...
  • Page 738 Document Feed Components Feed belt unit [C] Slide the tension plate [D] (hook) Belt unit cover [E] (  x 1) B802...

  • Page 739: Separation Roller

    Document Feed Components Belt tension unit [F] Feed belt [G] 1.2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER Open the left cover. Separation roller cover [A] Remove the bushing [B] ( x 1). Slide the separation roller shaft to the front side, and then remove it. Separation roller [C] (...

  • Page 740: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1.3.1 DF DRIVE BOARD Rear cover ( 1.1.1"Front and Rear Cover") DF drive board [A] (  x 4, all  s) 1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR Open the left cover. Remove the tray stopper [A], while pushing the hook with a screw driver. B802...

  • Page 741: Original Set, Separation, Skew Correction And Scanning Entrance Sensor

    Electrical Components Open the original tray [B]. Original tray cover [C] (  x 3) Original trailing edge sensor [D] ( x 1, hook) Original length sensors [E] ( x 1 each, hook) 1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET, SEPARATION, SKEW CORRECTION AND SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR Open the left cover.

  • Page 742: Original Width Sensors

    Electrical Components Original set sensor [B] (  x 1, hook) Separation sensor [C] (  x 1, hook) Skew correction sensor [D] (  x 1, hook) Scanning entrance sensor [E] (  x 1, hook) 1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS Open the left cover.

  • Page 743: Registration Sensor

    Electrical Components 1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR Open the ARDF. White plate [A] (stud screw x 1) Registration sensor bracket [B] ( x 1) Registration sensor [C] ( x 1) 1.3.6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR Open the left cover. Open the feed-in guide plate [A]. Guide plate [B] ( ...

  • Page 744: Df Position Sensor

    Electrical Components 1.3.7 DF POSITION SENSOR Rear cover ( 1.1.1 "Front and Rear Cover") ARDF drive board ( 1.3.1 "ARDF Drive Board") DF position sensor bracket [A] (  x 1) DF position sensor [B] (  x 1, hook) 1.3.8 COVER SENSOR Open the left cover.

  • Page 745: Pick-Up Roller Hp And Original Stopper Hp Sensor

    Electrical Components 1.3.9 PICK-UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR Open the left cover. Rear cover ( 1.1.1 "Front and Rear Cover") Release the clamp [A] ( x 1), and then slide the harnesses away. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1,  x 2) Pick-up roller HP sensor [C] (hook) Original stopper HP sensor [D] (hook) B802...

  • Page 746: Stamp Solenoid

    Electrical Components 1.3.10 STAMP SOLENOID Open the left cover. Remove the platen plate [A]. Stamp solenoid cover [B] (  x 1) Remove the screw [C] (  x 1). You cannot remove the stamp solenoid at this time. Rear cover ( 1.1.1.
  • Page 747 Electrical Components Put the stamp solenoid harness into the cutout [E]. Pull out the stamp solenoid [F] B802...

  • Page 748: Original Feed Drive

    Original Feed Drive 1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE 1.4.1 ADF FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( 1.1.1 "Front and Rear Cover") Harness guide [A] (  x 2, all s, all  s) Remove the spring [B]. Stay bracket [C] (stepped screw x 1) Slide the feed motor gear [D] to the left side (seen from the front of the machine), and then remove the timing belt [E].

  • Page 749: Adf Inverter Motor

    Original Feed Drive 1.4.2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR ADF feed motor ( 1.4.1 " ADF Feed Motor") ADF inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 1, timing belt) ADF inverter motor [B] ( x 4) 1.4.3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR Rear cover ( 1.1.1 "Front and Rear Cover") Ground cable [A] ( ...
  • Page 750 Original Feed Drive Harness guide [A] (  x 2, all  s, all Stay bracket [B] (stepped screw x 1) Release 6 clamps on the ADF pick-up motor bracket [C] ( x 6). ADF pick-up motor bracket [D] (  x 3, x 1) ADF pick-up motor [E] ( ...

  • Page 751: Detailed Descriptions

    Component Layout 2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1. Original Width Sensor 11. Original Length Sensor 3 2. Skew Correction Roller 12. Inverter Roller 3. Skew Correction Sensor 13. Junction Gate 4. Separation Sensor 14. Exit Roller 5.

  • Page 752: Electrical Component Layout

    Component Layout 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT Sensors and Drive Components 1. Original Width Sensors 12. Original Length Sensor 2 2. Scanning Entrance Sensor 13. Original Length Sensor 4 3. Skew Correction Sensor 14. DF Drive Board 4. ADF Transport Motor 15.
  • Page 753 Component Layout Electrical Component Descriptions Name Function Index No. Motors Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and reverse ADF Feed table rollers. ADF Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers ADF Inverter Drives the Inverter rollers Pick-up Motor Moves the pick-up roller up and down. Sensors DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not.
  • Page 754 Component Layout Original Length - M Detects the original length - M. Original Length - L Detects the original length - L. Original Set Detects if an original is on the feed table. Detects the leading edge of the original to turn on the junction gate solenoid and checks for original misfeeds.

  • Page 755: Drive Layout

    Component Layout 2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1. Registration Roller 2. Transport Roller 3. Skew Correction Roller 4. Separation Roller 5. Feed Belt 6. ADF Transport Motor 7. Pick-up Roller 8. Exit Roller 9. ADF Inverter Motor 10. ADF Feed Motor 11. Inverter Roller B802...
  • Page 756 Component Layout ADF Feed Motor ADF Feed Motor [A] drives the pick-up [B], feed belt [C], separation [D] and skew correction rollers [E]. ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor ADF Transport Motor [A] drives the registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and exit roller [D].

  • Page 757: Basic Operation

    Basic Operation 2.2 BASIC OPERATION 2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION The original size detection mechanism consists of the five original width sensors ([A]: Width Sensor SS, [B]: Width Sensor S, [C] Width Sensor M, [D]: Width Sensor L, [E]: Width Sensor LL) and three original length sensors ([F]: Length Sensor S, [G]: Length Sensor M, [H]: Length Sensor L).
  • Page 758 Basic Operation B5/LEF (257 x 182) A5/SEF (148 x 210) A5/LEF (210 x 148) 11" x 17"/SEF (DLT) 11" x 15"/SEF 10" x 14"/SEF 8.5" x 14"/SEF (LG) 8.5" x 13"/SEF (F4) 8.25" x 13"/SEF 8" x 13"/SEF (F) 8.5" x 11"/SEF (LT) 8.5"...

  • Page 759: Mixed Original Size Mode

    Basic Operation Symbols O: Yes (Default), : Yes (Can select this with SP mode), ON: Paper present, LT: North America, A/B: Europe, Asia For "O/ " mark, which has superscripted number, it is possible to change the original detection size with SP6-016. For example, instead of LT (O ), the machine can be set up to detect 10”...

  • Page 760: Pick-Up And Separation

    Basic Operation Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores the original order) Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray Normal feed-in In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement ratio has been determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the scanned images, a large area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm length) is prepared.

  • Page 761: Skew Correction

    Basic Operation 2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION When an original is fed into the feeder, the feed motor [A] rotates forwards. At this time, the feed belt turns but the skew correction roller [B] does not, because these rollers have a one-way gear. (If the ADF feed motor rotates forward, the feed belt is moved. If the ADF feed motor rotates in reverse, the skew correction roller is moved.) As a result, when the leading edge of the paper gets to the skew correction roller, skew in the original is removed.

  • Page 762: Slip Detection

    Basic Operation 2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION [A]: Separation sensor [B]: Skew correction sensor These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for this. The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation sensor [A] after the [Start] key is pressed.
  • Page 763 Basic Operation speed. After skew correction, the feed and transport motors feed the original through the scanning area at a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [B] and DF exposure glass [C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the transport roller [D] and exit roller [E].

  • Page 764: Conditions For Jam Detection

    Basic Operation (while the original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The original set sensor monitors the stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in. The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.

  • Page 765: Service Tables

    Dip Switches 3. SERVICE TABLES 3.1 DIP SWITCHES DIP-SW Function Normal operating mode (Default) Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: No original: One-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: No original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 32% speed Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 32% speed Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 70% speed...
  • Page 767 BOOKLET FINISHER & FINISHER SR3020/SR3030/SR4010/SR4020 B804/B805/D373/D374 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None...
  • Page 769 BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020/ FINISHER SR3030 B804/B805 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........1 1.1 COVERS ....................... 1 1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS................1 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE..............2 1.2 MAIN UNIT ....................3 1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH........3 1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER ..............
  • Page 770 2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT................22 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............24 2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......... 28 2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT................. 38 2.2 JUNCTION GATES ..................40 2.2.1 PROOF MODE................... 40 2.2.2 SHIFT MODE ..................40 2.2.3 STAPLE MODE.................. 41 2.3 PRE-STACKING ..................42 2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM ..............
  • Page 771 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. : See or Refer to ...

  • Page 773: Replacement And Adjustment

    Covers 1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1.1 COVERS 1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS Open the front door [D]. Small upper cover [A] ( x1) Upper cover [B] ( x2) Front door bracket [C] ( x1) Front door [D] Front left side cover [E] ( x2) Cover [F] Paper exit cover [G] (...

  • Page 774: Upper Tray, End Fence

    Covers 1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE Remove the rear cover. (* "Exterior Covers") Support the tray [A] with your right hand. Pull gear [B] toward you x to release. Slowly lower the tray y until it stops. Front side cover [C] (  x1) Rear side cover [D] ( ...

  • Page 775: Main Unit

    Main Unit 1.2 MAIN UNIT 1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover") End fence ( 1.1.2 "Upper Tray, End Fence") Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( x4,  x3) Upper tray limit sensor [B] (...

  • Page 776: Positioning Roller

    Main Unit 1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER Open the front door [A]. Pull out the stapling unit [B]. Positioning roller [C] (  x1, timing belt x1) 1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR Small upper cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Cover") Proof tray exit sensor bracket [A] (  x1) B804/B805...

  • Page 777: Upper Tray Height Sensors

    Main Unit Proof tray exit sensor [B] (  x1) 1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 Small upper cover, upper cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Cover") Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( x1) Upper tray paper height sensor [B] – staple mode (S08) ( x1) Upper tray paper height sensor [C] –...

  • Page 778: Proof Tray Full Sensor

    Main Unit Exit guide plate [B] (  x1, Link and spring,  x1,  x1) Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) (  x1) 1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR Exit guide plate. ( 1.2.5 "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor") Guide plate [A] (hook x 2) Sensor bracket [B] ( ...

  • Page 779: Finisher Entrance Sensor

    Main Unit 1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1) Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) ( x1) 1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier. Sensor bracket [A] Pre-stack tray exit sensor [B] (S2) B804/B805...

  • Page 780: Stapler Unit

    Stapler Unit 1.3 STAPLER UNIT 1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit. Inner cover [A] (  x3) Stapler unit holder [B] (  x1) Corner stapler [C] (M20) (  x1) B804/B805...

  • Page 781: Positioning Roller

    Stapler Unit 1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER Open the front door [A]. Pull out the stapling unit [B]. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1) B804/B805...

  • Page 782: Fold Unit

    Fold Unit 1.4 FOLD UNIT 1.4.1 FOLD UNIT Remove the back cover ( 1.1.1 "Exterior Covers"). Open the front door. The stapler unit is heavy. Ground cable [A] (  x1) x6,  x6) Harness [B] ( Stapler unit [C] (  x4) B804/B805...
  • Page 783 Fold Unit Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling. The fold unit is heavy. Folding unit [D] (  x4, x2,  x6) If you have replaced the folding unit: Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.

  • Page 784: Fold Unit Entrance Sensor

    Fold Unit 1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.3.2 "Positioning Roller"). Fold unit entrance sensor bracket [A] (  x2) Fold unit entrance sensor [B] (S26) (  x1,  x1) 1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR Open the front door.

  • Page 785: Stack Present Sensor

    Fold Unit Fold unit upper cover [C] (  x1) Paper clamp mechanism [D] (  x4) Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] (  x1) Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) (  x1) 1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time, do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor.

  • Page 786: Folding Horizontal Skew Adjustment (For B804 Only)

    Fold Unit Guide plate [A]. Stay [B] (  x4) Left plate [C] (  x4) Sensor bracket [D] (  x1) Stack present sensor [E] (S32) (  x1) 1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory.
  • Page 787 Fold Unit Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher. Open the guide plate [B]. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.) Remove the lock screw [D]. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its own weight.
  • Page 788 Fold Unit 15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out. 16. Open the guide plate [I]. 17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test sheet.

  • Page 789: Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment (For B804 Only)

    Fold Unit 1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even. Switch the copier on. Do a folding test.
  • Page 790 Fold Unit B804/B805...

  • Page 791: Booklet Stapler Unit

    Booklet Stapler Unit 1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT 1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER Open the front door. Pull out the stapler unit ( 1.2.2 "Positioning Roller"). Harness cover [A] ( x2) Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( x4,  x2, Stapler [C] ( x4) 1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR Open the front door.
  • Page 792 Booklet Stapler Unit Stay [A] (  x4). Left plate [B] (  x4) Harness cover [C] (  x2) Booklet stapler support stay [D] (  x4,  x2, Booklet stapler [E] (  x4) Booklet stapler motor [F] (  x2,  x1) To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
  • Page 793 Booklet Stapler Unit Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay. This tool is included with the stapler spare part. Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops. Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor. Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.

  • Page 794: Detailed Section Descriptions

    Component Layout 2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS 2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT 2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT 1. Proof Tray Junction Gate 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)* 2. Punch Unit 8. Folder Rollers* 3. Stapler Junction Gate 9. Folder Plate* 4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate 10. Booklet Stapler* 5.

  • Page 795: Paper Direction

    Component Layout : B804 Only Paper direction The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters the finisher: Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray...

  • Page 796: Electrical Components

    Component Layout 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Upper Area B804/B805 1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) 10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2) 2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13) (SOL2) 12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10) 3. Upper Transport Motor (M2) 13.
  • Page 797 Component Layout Lower Area B804/B805 8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14) 1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) 9. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)* 2. Lower Transport Motor (M3) 10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)* 3. Entrance Motor (M1) 11.
  • Page 798 Component Layout Punch Unit B702 1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) 6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22) 2. Punch Drive Motor (M24) 7. Paper Position Sensor (S3) 3. Punch HP Sensor (S24) 8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) 4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3) 9.
  • Page 799 Component Layout Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805 7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15) 1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) 2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* 9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6) 3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 10.

  • Page 800: Summary Of Electrical Components

    Component Layout B804 Fold unit 1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) 6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30) 2. Fold Roller Motor (M12) 7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28) 3. Fold Plate Motor (M11) 8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26) 4.
  • Page 801 Component Layout Component Function Boards (PCB) PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing. PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit. Motors Finisher Entrance Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch Motor waste transport belt of the punch unit.
  • Page 802 Component Layout Component Function are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance (3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence positions the stack for folding and while the stack is folded by the fold rollers.
  • Page 803 Component Layout Component Function lowers the stack 10 mm below the fold position, and then raises it to the fold position. Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction gate at the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is Stack Junction Gate open, it directs the ascending stack to the upper tray if it Motor...
  • Page 804 Component Layout Component Function Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the stapling tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when Pre-stack Tray Exit the copier is switched on. (This sensor performs no Sensor timing function. The entire flow of paper through the pre-stacking mechanism is controlled by motor pulse counts.) The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and...
  • Page 805 Component Layout Component Function This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height Upper Tray Paper sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This Height Sensor (Staple sensor detects the paper height of the stack in the upper Mode) tray when the copier is operating in the staple mode.
  • Page 806 Component Layout Component Function back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the bottom of the stack aligned. A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the Stapling Tray Paper stapling tray. When this sensor detects paper, the Sensor bottom fence motor raises or lowers the bottom fence to position the selected paper size for booklet stapling.
  • Page 807 Component Layout Component Function B804: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher. There is only one upper tray full sensor (S18). Upper Tray Full B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the Sensor (B805 only) lower tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper.
  • Page 808 Component Layout Component Function Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the Fold Bottom Fence HP folding unit using pulse counts based on the size of the Sensor paper selected for the job to position the stack correctly for feeding. Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this sensor controls the movement of the fold plate .
  • Page 809 Component Layout Component Function sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.) This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray full sensor pair.

  • Page 810: Drive Layout

    Component Layout Component Function Switches Front Door Safety The safety switch cuts the dc power when the front door Switch is opened. A micro-switch cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This switch Upper Tray Limit SW duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor (S12) and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.
  • Page 811 Component Layout 1. Upper Transport Motor (M2) 6. Folder Plate Motor* (M11) 2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4) 7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14) 3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21) 8. Lower Transport Motor (M3) 4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5) 9. Entrance Motor (M1) 5.

  • Page 812: Junction Gates

    Junction Gates 2.2 JUNCTION GATES The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed after paper enters the finisher. 2.2.1 PROOF MODE Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed. The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.

  • Page 813: Staple Mode

    Junction Gates 2.2.3 STAPLE MODE Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling. B804/B805...

  • Page 814: Pre-Stacking

    Pre-Stacking 2.3 PRE-STACKING This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that contain three pages. [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
  • Page 815 Pre-Stacking In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time. In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time. B804/B805...

  • Page 816: Tray Movement Mechanism

    Tray Movement Mechanism 2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM 2.4.1 UPPER TRAY [A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor [B]: Upper Feeler [C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 (Staple Mode) [D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 (Non-Staple Mode) [E]: Lower Feeler [F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor [G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch [H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at...
  • Page 817 Tray Movement Mechanism A4, LT. Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A]. Upper Tray Raising and Lowering Sensors, Switch Action Operation Mode Stops the lift motor at the standby position when the actuator of the upper Standby feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is (Non-Staple...

  • Page 818: Lower Tray (B804 Only)

    Tray Movement Mechanism When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT) The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804.
  • Page 819 Tray Movement Mechanism If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF), the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When booklet mode is selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel. The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises determines the number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
  • Page 820 Tray Movement Mechanism Lower Tray Full Condition Table A3 (DLT) 1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht … Full 1 3 Cnt — — — — — — — —...

  • Page 821: Corner Stapling

    Corner Stapling 2.5 CORNER STAPLING 2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING [A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15) [B]: Jogger Fences [C]: Positioning Roller [D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15) [E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4) [F]: Pressure Plate At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).

  • Page 822: Stapler Movement

    Corner Stapling size. This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence. This aligns the edge of the stack. Next, the jogger fence motor: Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the stack to align the sides of the stack.
  • Page 823 Corner Stapling The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes: Front 1 staple Rear 1 staple Rear diagonal staple Rear/Front 2 staples The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its stainless steel rail.

  • Page 824: Corner Stapling

    Corner Stapling 2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires the stapler [C]. The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position. The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition. B804/B805...

  • Page 825: Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) 2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM [A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5) [B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm [C]: Booklet Pressure Roller As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed out belt moves.

  • Page 826: Booklet Stapling And Folding

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING Overview 1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller 13. Corner Stapler (M20) 2. Stack Present Sensor (S32) 14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14) 3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 15. Feed Out Belt 4.
  • Page 827 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet.
  • Page 828 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops.
  • Page 829 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2]. The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4]. With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out.
  • Page 830 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the fold rollers.
  • Page 831 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown) detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position. The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray.

  • Page 832: Booklet Stapling And Folding Mechanisms

    Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) 2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS Booklet Stapler [A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position. [B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear [C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front Stack Junction Gate [D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam. [E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam.
  • Page 833 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) Clamp Roller [A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller x as well as the fold rollers (see next page). [B]: Clamp Rollers. x Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down with the retracting roller closed.
  • Page 834 Booklet Stapling (B804 Only) Fold Plate [A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers. [B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate. [C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).

  • Page 835: Upper Tray Output

    Upper Tray Output 2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2.7.1 FEED OUT [A]: Feed Out Belt Motor [B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt [C]: Pawl [D]: Exit Rollers [E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor [F]: Exit Guide Plate [G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor [H]: Upper Tray After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B].

  • Page 836: Feed Out Stacking

    Upper Tray Output The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high. Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position sensor and switches off the motor. There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out operation.

  • Page 837: Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) 2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) 2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION Skew Correction before Punching This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time. Paper feeds out of the copier.
  • Page 838 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) Punch Unit Position Correction These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase the accuracy of the punch alignment. ‚: The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A]. The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the paper.

  • Page 839: Punch Mechanisms

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment: SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed. SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed. For more, see Section "Service Tables". 2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection B804/B805...
  • Page 840 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Finisher Entrance Roller [C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1) [D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7) [E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27) [F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from the copier into the finisher.
  • Page 841 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9) [B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21) [C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24) The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the correct position for punching. The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.

  • Page 842: Punch Hopper Mechanism

    Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F]. When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder detects the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching. This is the ‘1’...
  • Page 843 Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805) [A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1) [B]: Punch Waste Belt [C]: Punch Waste Hopper [D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4) The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt [B].

  • Page 844: Finisher Jam Detection

    Finisher Jam Detection 2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION Display Mode What It Means Finisher After main machine exit sensor goes OFF, entrance finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even Proof sensor late after enough time to feed 450 mm. R1 to R3 Shift Finisher After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does...
  • Page 845 Finisher Jam Detection Display Mode What It Means After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper Upper tray exit tray exit sensor does not go ON even after sensor late enough time to feed 485 mm. Shift After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper Upper tray exit tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after sensor lag...

  • Page 847: Scanner Accessibility Option

    SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE 4045 B838 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 10/08/2008 New Information –...
  • Page 849 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE 4045 B838 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B838).........1 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS............... 1 1.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............. 1 1.1.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS............... 1 1.1.3 ACCESSORY CHECK ................. 3 1.2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR COVERS ............ 5 1.3 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT ........7 1.4 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT........
  • Page 851 Read This First Safety and Symbols Replacement Procedure Safety Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual. Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols. :See or Refer to : Screws : Connector...

  • Page 853: Installation Requirements

    INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1. SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION (B838) 1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • Install the scanner on a solid base. • Do not install the scanner in areas where the unit can fall down when the ADF cover is opened. •...
  • Page 854 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS • The scanner should be positioned as follows: Within 250 mm (9.8") from the left and rear side of the main unit Within 550 mm (21.7") from the right side of the main unit Height: 380 to 1200 mm (1.3 to 4 ft.) B838I120.WMF B838...

  • Page 855: Accessory Check

    INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 1.1.3 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list. Description Q'ty Top Rear Cover Rear Bracket Key Counter Bracket (only for installing key counter) Left Scanner Stay Right Bottom Plate Left Bottom Plate Left Stopper Right Stopper Cable Bracket Unit Operation Panel Interface Board...
  • Page 856 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS B838I501.WMF B838...

  • Page 857: Removal Procedure For Covers

    Removal Procedure for Covers 1.2 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR COVERS 1. Scanner left cover [1] ( x 2) 2. Slide the scanner rear cover [2] to the left side, and then remove it ( x 1, hook x 2). 3. Left rear cover [3] ( x 1) 4.
  • Page 858 Removal Procedure for Covers 9. Front right cover [9] ( x 1) 10. Operation panel with the scanner front cover [10] ( x 6; M3x3 bind [10] screw x 2, M3x5 bind screw x 2 on the top of the scanner front cover, M3x8 tapping screw x 2 on the bottom of the scanner front cover) B222R157.WMF...

  • Page 859: Removal Procedure For Scanner Unit

    Removal Procedure for Scanner Unit 1.3 REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT 1. Controller box right cover [1] x 8) B838R107.WMF 2. Remove the clamp plate [2] ( x 1). 3. Disconnect the scanner I/F cable [3] from the connector (CN509) on the IPU ( x 1, ground cable x 1).
  • Page 860 Removal Procedure for Scanner Unit 6. Scanner unit [6] ( x 5; right side x 2, left side x 3) B838R902.PNG 7. Scanner left stay [7] ( x 3) B838R904.PNG B838...

  • Page 861: Connecting Procedure For Scanner Unit

    Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 1.4 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR SCANNER UNIT 1. Rear scale [1] ( x 3; stepped screw) 2. Glass cover [2] ( x 2; stepped screw) 3. Exposure glass with the left scale B838R153.WMF 4. Disconnect the connectors [4] (CN312, CN318) from the SIO.
  • Page 862 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 8. Remove the clamp [7] for the scanner I/F cable ( x 1). This clamp will be used hereafter. B838R906.PNG 9. Disconnect the BICU interface harness [8] (CN310 on the SIO), and then remove it. 10.
  • Page 863 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 14. Scanner I/F cable [13] ( x 1, ground cable x 1) 15. Operation panel I/F harness [14] B838R908.PNG x 5) B838R909.PNG 16. Scanner left stay [15] ( x 2) 17. Move the scanner carriage [16] to the center position. B838R910.PNG B838...
  • Page 864 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 18. Install the left bottom plate [17] in the place as shown ( x 1; M3x6 blue screw). B838R911.PNG 19. Install the right bottom plate [18] in the place as shown ( x 1; M3x6 blue screw).
  • Page 865 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 21. Install the two spacers [20], adjusters [21] and seal [a] in the bottom [22] of the scanner unit. B838R914.PNG 22. Move the scanner carriage [23] to its home position. 23. Reinstall the scanner left stay [24] ( x 2).
  • Page 866 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 24. Install the rear bracket [25] to the outside of the scanner rear frame ( x 2; M3x6 blue screw). B838R916.PNG 25. Install the left bracket [26] to the outside of the scanner left frame ( x 2;...
  • Page 867 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 26. Clean the inside of the scanner left frame with a cloth absorbing alcohol. 27. Attach the gasket [27] to the inside of the scanner left frame aligning with two projections [28]. B838R918.PNG 28. Clean the lens bracket with a cloth absorbing alcohol.
  • Page 868 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 31. Put the scanner I/F cable [31] through the cutout of the scanner rear frame. B838R921.PNG 32. Reinstall the SBU [32] ( x 4, [33] [34] 2: 15 pins connector, 30 pins connector) and ground cable of the scanner I/F cable ( x 1).
  • Page 869 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 37. Install the clamp [36] and saddle clamp [37] as shown ( x 2). B838R923.PNG 38. Route the operation panel I/F cable [38] and clamp it ( x 2). B838R924.PNG 39. Route and connect the BICU interface cable [39] to CN311 on the SIO ( x 1).
  • Page 870 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit 40. Route and connect the power supply cable [40] to CN310 on the SIO ( x 4). 41. Secure two ground cables [41] (BICU interface cable and power supply cable) ( x 1; M3x6 blue screw).
  • Page 871 Connecting Procedure for Scanner Unit [47] 45. Reinstall the exposure glass with [48] left scale [46]. 46. Reinstall the glass cover [47] (stepped screw x 2). 47. Reinstall the rear scale [48] (stepped screw x 3). [46] B838R153.WMF B838...

  • Page 872: Connecting Procedure For Op Panel

    Connecting Procedure for Op Panel 1.5 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR OP PANEL 1. Route and attach the operation panel I/F cable to the outside of the scanner right frame with four plate clamps ( x 4; screw - tapping M3x8). B838R928.PNG NOTE: Make sure that the operation panel I/F cable [A] does not cover the three cutouts [B].
  • Page 873 Connecting Procedure for Op Panel 3. Remove the two screws on the operation panel drive board [4]. 4. Attach the operation panel interface board [3] as shown ( x 2; these are removed in step 3 in this procedure). 5. Connect the harness [2] to CN700 on the operation panel drive board and install the core [5] (RFC-8).
  • Page 874 Connecting Procedure for Op Panel 8. Remove the clip tray [9] from the scanner front cover [10]. 9. Attach the scanner front cover [11] to the operation panel ( x 2). B838R933.PNG 10. Reinstall the operation panel with the scanner front cover [12] in the scanner front frame ( x 6;...

  • Page 875: Harness Bracket Attachment Procedure

    Harness Bracket Attachment Procedure 1.6 HARNESS BRACKET ATTACHMENT PROCEDURE 1. Cut off the rear right [1] of the scanner top rear cover with a cutter. B838R935.PNG 2. Reinstall the scanner top rear cover [2] ( x 1; M3x8 tapping screw). B838R936.PNG 3.
  • Page 876 Harness Bracket Attachment Procedure 5. Install the core [4] (RFC-9) to the operation panel I¥F cable, ring core [5] (TFCM-41-27-16) to the bound cables and the cores [6] (RFC-13) to the other cables. B838R938.PNG 6. Install the ARDF [7] or platen cover on the scanner unit (stud screw x B838R939.PNG 7.

  • Page 877: Connecting Procedure For Mainframe

    Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 1.7 CONNECTING PROCEDURE FOR MAINFRAME 1. Controller box stay [1] ( x 4) 2. Open the IOB bracket [2] ( x 5, flat cable x 1, x 1). B222R109.WMF 3. Install the core [3] (TFC16816) in the harness of CN510 (on the IPU) and the core [4] (RFC-8) in the harness of CN540 (on the MB).
  • Page 878 Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 7. Install the core [6] (RFC-13) in the power supply cables on the IH inverter. B838R943.PNG 8. Install the cable bracket [7] in the rear frame of the mainframe ( x 3; screw-tapping M3x6). 9. Route and connect the heater relay B838R944.PNG cable [8] to the heater cable [9] of the mainframe.
  • Page 879 Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 11. Connect three connectors [11] to the outside of the controller box. 12. Secure the two ground cables [12] x 1; screw-tapping M3x6). B838R946.PNG 13. Route the scanner I/F cable [13] and connect it to CN509 (on the IPU) ( 14.
  • Page 880 Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 16. Install the MB interface board [17] ( x 1; screw-tapping M3x6). B838R948.PNG 17. Install the core [18] (RFC-8) in between binds on the long relay harness [19]. 18. Route the long relay harness [20] B838R949.PNG with the connector, which has two binds, connecting to the MB and the connector, which has one bind,...
  • Page 881 Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 21. Reinstall the controller box right cover ( x 8). 22. Install the left scanner stay [22] ( x 2; M4x6 tapping screw) in the left side of the main machine. 23. Reinstall the left cover ( x 6).
  • Page 882 Connecting Procedure for Mainframe 30. Attach the three caps [25] to the screw holes on the top right cover. 31. Install the ring core [26] B838R954.PNG (TFCM-41-27-16) to the bound cables and the cores [27] (RFC-13) to the other cables. B838R955.PNG 32.

  • Page 883: Installation For Key Counter

    Installation for Key Counter 1.8 INSTALLATION FOR KEY COUNTER 1. Cut off and remove the parts [1] with a cutter. 2. Attach the key counter front bracket [2] and rear bracket [3] to the reverse side of the top right cover ( x 4;...
  • Page 884 Installation for Key Counter 6. Put the key counter harness [6] through the cut out [7]. 7. Install the top right cover in the machine and attach the caps to the screw holes ( steps 29 and 30 in "Connecting Procedure for Mainframe").
  • Page 885 FAX OPTION TYPE 5000 D346 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew 10/08/2009 Error Code 31-21 added. 01/30/2009 Updated Information –...
  • Page 887 FAX OPTION TYPE 5000 (D346) TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............1 1.1 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION ..............1 1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................ 1 1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........2 1.2 G3 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION............ 5 1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................ 5 1.2.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD ............
  • Page 888 4.3 BIT SWITCHES................... 56 4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ................ 57 4.3.2 I-FAX SWITCHES................69 4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES ............... 76 4.3.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES ............82 4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES .................. 91 4.3.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES ................100 4.3.7 IP FAX SWITCHES................108 4.4 NCU PARAMETERS................. 117 4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS........
  • Page 889 Read This First Important Safety Notices Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
  • Page 890 Symbols and Abbreviations Conventions Used in this Manual This manual uses several symbols. Symbol What it means Refer to section number Screw Connector E-ring Clip ring Clamp Cautions, Notes, etc. The following headings provide special information: Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death. Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.

  • Page 891: Installation Procedure

    Fax Option Installation 1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1.1 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION 1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Screw: M3x6 Handset Support Bracket (NA only) Handset Bracket (NA only) Telephone Cable (NA only) Data Display Decal Sheet (20 languages) FCC Decal (NA only) Serial Number Decal...

  • Page 892: Fax Option Installation Procedure

    Fax Option Installation 1.1.2 FAX OPTION INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Before installation: If there is a printer option in the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer. Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power LED is off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
  • Page 893 Fax Option Installation Attach the serial number decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe. For NA models, attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe. Remove the FCU cover [A] ( x 3). Press down the MBU. Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly.
  • Page 894 Fax Option Installation Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 1" jack. Remove dummy keytop [E] and replace it with the Fax keytop [F]. 10. Attach the Super G3 decal [G]. 11. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch. After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you the SRAM has been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to clear the message.

  • Page 895: G3 Interface Board Installation

    G3 Interface Board Installation 1.2 G3 INTERFACE BOARD INSTALLATION 1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty SG3 Interface Unit Flat Cable Screw: M3x6 Telephone Cable (NA only) FCC Decal (NA only) D346...

  • Page 896: Installation: One G3 Board

    G3 Interface Board Installation 1.2.2 INSTALLATION: ONE G3 BOARD Remove the knockout (LINE 2) [A] with nippers from the FCU. Attach one end (short length) of the flat cable to the connector [B] of the FCU board. Attach the other end (long length) of the flat cable to the connector [C] of the CCUIF. Attach the SG3 interface unit [D] ( x 3).

  • Page 897: Installation: Two G3 Boards

    G3 Interface Board Installation 1.2.3 INSTALLATION: TWO G3 BOARDS Remove the SG3 board [A] from the second SG3 interface unit [B] for the two-SG3 board installation ( x 2). Attach the SG3 board [A] to the interface board [C] of the first SG3 interface unit ( Remove the two knockouts [D].
  • Page 898 G3 Interface Board Installation 10. Turn the main switch off and on. 11. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that "G3" shows as an option. 12. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-3 communications. 13. Attach the FCC decal near the serial number plate of the mainframe. D346...

  • Page 899: Fax Unit Options

    Fax Unit Options 1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS 1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) FCU ( "Installation Procedure" in the "Fax Unit (D346)") Install the memory option in the memory slot [A]. Reaasemble the machine. 1.3.2 HANDSET (B433) The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only. Remove the scanner left cover [A] ( x 2).
  • Page 900 Fax Unit Options Make two holes [B] in the scanner left cover. Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver. Attach the hand set support bracket [C] inside the scanner left cover. Hold the handset bracket [D] and handset support bracket (set inside the scanner left cover).
  • Page 901 Fax Unit Options Install the scanner left cover on the machine. Attach the clamp to the location [E]. Set the handset on the handset bracket. Clamp the hand set cord. 10. Connect the handset cable to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine. D346...
  • Page 902 2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2.1 FCU When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer Setting >...

  • Page 903: Troubleshooting

    Error Codes 3. TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 ERROR CODES If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service report. Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action...
  • Page 904 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode Check the line connection. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable Modem training fails even equalizer. 0-05 G3 shifts down to 2400 Replace the FCU.
  • Page 905 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer settings. The other end may have a defective modem/FCU; try sending to another machine. Check for line problems and noise. Cross reference Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN) Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode...
  • Page 906 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action line problem. Cross reference See error code 0-08. Check the line connection. Replace the FCU. Check for line problems. Facsimile data not Try calling another fax machine. 0-20 received within 6 s of Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the retraining first line and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
  • Page 907 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Defective remote terminal. Check for line noise or other line problems. Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level. Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx error criteria. Cross reference Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN) Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1...
  • Page 908 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action specified in CM/JM was communication mode (e.g., the other terminal not available was a V.34 data modem and not a fax (V.8 calling and called modem.) terminal) A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal when polling rx was initiated from the calling terminal.
  • Page 909 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action due to a timeout in V.34 these phases. Serious noise, narrow phase 2 – line probing. bandwidth, or low signal level can cause these errors. The line was disconnected If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal: due to a timeout in V.34 Try making a call at a later time.
  • Page 910 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action after an unsuccessful channel because data reception in the primary primary channel. channel was not successful. This does not result in an error communication. The line was disconnected because PPR was Try using a lower data rate at the start. 0-88 transmitted/received 9 Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
  • Page 911 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace 2-50 for a fatal FCU system the FCU. error The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace 2-51 because of a fatal the FCU.
  • Page 912 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Replace the FCU. G3 ECM - T1 time out 6-00 during reception of facsimile data Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer. G3 ECM - no V.21 signal Replace the FCU. 6-01 was received G3 ECM - EOR was 6-02 received Check the line connection.
  • Page 913 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action received at the other end Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or after all communication the dedicated tx parameter for that address). attempts at 2400 bps Check the line connection. Defective remote terminal. V.21 flag detected during The other terminal may be defective or 6-21...
  • Page 914 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action system administrator is not registered. Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout) because the server could not be found. The PC is not ready to transfer files. 14-01 SMTP Connection Failed SMTP server not functioning correctly. The DNS IP address is not registered.
  • Page 915 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action problem at the destination at that the settings at the destination are correct. Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly 14-04 Denied (550) Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full.
  • Page 916 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action Failed to access the SMTP server because the transmission failed. Data Send to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly 14-08 Failed (5XX) Destination folder setting incorrect. Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly. Software application error. POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization Authorization Failed for 14-09...
  • Page 917 Error Codes Rev. 09/2008 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action software. Update the software because of the defective 14-17 Incorrect Ticket software. 14-18 The access to MCS file is denied due to the no permission of access. Access to MCS File Error Update the software because of the defective software.
  • Page 918 Service Call Conditions Rev. 09/2008 board NVRAM read/write error Replace the NVRAM Turn the machine power off/on 30 A NVRAM error If the error reoccurs, replace the controller board 31 A See SC991 HDD data encryption error Encryption of data on the hard disk failed. HDD check error Format the HDD Power loss during...
  • Page 919 Error Codes Rev. 09/2008 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action server is not stored in the machine. The DNS IP address is not registered. Network not operating correctly. POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed: Incorrect IFAX user name or password. 15-12 Authorization Error Access was attempted by another device, such as the PC.
  • Page 920 Error Codes Rev. 09/2008 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action transmission. Reception rejected because the transaction 15-41 SMTP Receive Error exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting. The delivery destination address was 15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF. Format error in the address of the Off Ramp 15-43 Address Format Error...
  • Page 921 Error Codes Rev. 09/2008 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted. Software error. The file could not be received because the 15-71 Not Binary Image Data attachment was not binary image data. Could not find the Disposition line in the 15-73 MDN Status Error header of the Return Receipt, or there is a...
  • Page 922 Error Codes Rev. 09/2008 Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action malfunction of SAF memory. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer request, because the ID code in the 15-94 Incorrect ID Code incoming e-mail did not match the ID code registered in the machine. The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for 15-95 Transfer Station Function...
  • Page 923 Rev. 10/08/2009 Error Codes Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action 25-00 The machine software resets itself after a fatal Update the ROM transmission error Replace the FCU. occurred • It was cancelled received LAN Fax images ⇒ during store the image to SAF of FCU. 31-21 LAN Fax Error •...

  • Page 924: Ifax Troubleshooting

    IFAX Troubleshooting 3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is causing the problem. Communication Item Action [Remarks] Route Check that the LAN cable is connected to 1. Connection with the machine.
  • Page 925 IFAX Troubleshooting Communication Item Action [Remarks] Route Make sure that the machine can log into the e-mail server. 2. E-mail account Check that the account and password on the server stored in the server are the same as in the machine. [Ask the administrator to check.] Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can...
  • Page 926 IFAX Troubleshooting Make sure that the e-mail address is 3. Destination actually used. e-mail address Check that the e-mail address contains no incorrect characters such as spaces. Use the “ping” command to contact the router. 4. Router settings Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router.

  • Page 927: Ip-Fax Troubleshooting

    IP-Fax Troubleshooting 3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name Check Point Action LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection. Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name. Cannot breach the firewall. Send by Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
  • Page 928 IP-Fax Troubleshooting IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to Check whether the remote fax 12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? cancelled the transmission. Cannot send via VoIP Gateway Check Point Action LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
  • Page 929 IP-Fax Troubleshooting Request the network administrator to increase the bandwidth. Raise the network delay level. 14 Network bandwidth too narrow? IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to Cannot send by Alias Fax number.

  • Page 930: Ip-Fax Reception

    IP-Fax Troubleshooting fax. 12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator. Check whether the remote fax is a T38 13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? terminal. 14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth.
  • Page 931 DNS server registered when host name The sender machine displays this specified on sender side? error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth. Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side.
  • Page 932 Contact the network administrator. Gatekeeper installed correctly? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. Contact the network administrator. Power to Gatekeeper switched on? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
  • Page 933 IPFAX SW06 Check whether the remote fax cancelled 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission? the transmission. Contact the network administrator. 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper? The sender machine displays this error code when the sender fax is a Ricoh model. D346...

  • Page 934: Service Table

    Beforehand 4. SERVICE TABLE 4.1 BEFOREHAND Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.

  • Page 935: Service Tables

    Service Tables 4.2 SERVICE TABLES 4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES) Bit Switches Mode No. Function System Switch Change the bit switches for system settings for the 001 – 032 00 – 1F fax option "Bit Switches" Ifax Switch Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for 001 –...

  • Page 936: Sp2-Xxx (Ram Data)

    Service Tables the optional G3 board "Bit Switches" G3-3 Switch Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of 001 – 016 00 – 0F the optional G3 board "Bit Switches" G4 Internal Switch 001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches) G4 Parameter Switch 001 –...

  • Page 937: Sp3-Xxx (Tel Line Settings)

    Service Tables Dump board. G4 Memory Dump Not used G3-1 NCU Parameters NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 board. "NCU Parameters" G3-2 NCU Parameters NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 001 – 023 CC, 01 –...
  • Page 938 Service Tables Memory Lock Not used Disabled PSTN-2 Port Settings Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”. PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2 Number line.

  • Page 939: Sp4-Xxx (Rom Versions)

    Service Tables Transmission Disabled IPFAX Port Settings H323 Port Sets the H323 port number. SIP Port Sets the SIP port number. RAS Port Sets the RAS port number. Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number. T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number. SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.

  • Page 940: Sp5-Xxx (Initializing)

    Service Tables 4.2.5 SP5-XXX (INITIALIZING) Mode No. Function Initialize SRAM Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock. Erase All Files Erases all files stored in the SAF memory. Reset Bit Switches Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
  • Page 941 Service Tables Service Monitor Report Touch the “ON” button to print the service monitor report. G3 Protocol Dump List G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all Communications communications for all G3 lines. G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
  • Page 942 Service Tables Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including confidential messages. Do not use this function, unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature. Journal Print out The machine prints all the communication All Journals records on the report.

  • Page 943: Sp7-Xxx (Test Modes)

    Service Tables Scanner Condition IP Protocol Dump List Prints the protocol dump list of all All Communications communications for the IP fax line. Prints the protocol dump list of the last 1 Communication communication for the IP fax line. 4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TEST MODES) These are the test modes for PTT approval.
  • Page 944 Service Tables G3-2 V34 (S3200baud) G3-2 V34 (S3429baud) G3-3 Modem Tests G3-3 DTMF Tests G3-3 V34 (S2400baud) G3-3 V34 (S2800baud) G3-3 V34 (S3000baud) G3-3 V34 (S3200baud) G3-3 V34 (S3429baud) IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S2800baud) - Not used IG3-1 V34 (S3000baud) - Not used...

  • Page 945: Sp9-Xxx (Design Switch Mode)

    Service Tables 4.2.8 SP9-XXX (DESIGN SWITCH MODE) Mode No. Function Design Switch D346...

  • Page 946: Bit Switches

    Bit Switches 4.3 BIT SWITCHES Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.

  • Page 947: System Switches

    Bit Switches 4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001] FUNCTION COMMENTS Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated Dedicated transmission transmission parameters. parameter programming Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled transmission parameters.
  • Page 948 Bit Switches So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB Do not change this setting. Not used When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed Line error mark print on the printout if a line error occurs during 0: OFF, 1: ON (print) reception.
  • Page 949 Bit Switches File retention time 0: Depends on User 1: A file that had a communication error will not be Parameter 24 [18(H)] erased unless the communication is successful. 1: No limit (until the year 2126) Not used Do not change this setting. (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
  • Page 950 Bit Switches 4-7 Not used Do not change these settings. System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 06 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 09 [SP No.
  • Page 951 Bit Switches power was turned off last. Conditions for printing the This switch becomes effective only when system protocol dump list switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1. 0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol 1: Print only when there is a dump list only for communications with errors.
  • Page 952 Bit Switches System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.) System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-1 Not used...
  • Page 953 Bit Switches 02: UK 12: Asia addresses. Cross reference 03: Italy 13: Japan NCU country code: SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1 04: Austria 14: Hong Kong SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2 05: Belgium 15: South Africa SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3 06: Denmark 16: Australia 07: Finland...
  • Page 954 Bit Switches FUNCTION COMMENTS TTI printing position 0: Superimposed on the page Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints data information that the customer considers to be 1: Printed before the data important (G3 transmissions). leading edge Not used Do not change the factory settings.
  • Page 955 Bit Switches Not used Do not change the settings. Going into the Energy Saver 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode automatically mode quickly, because the +5V power supply is 0: Enabled active even in the Energy Saver mode. 1: Disabled 2-3 Not used Do not change these settings.
  • Page 956 Bit Switches System Switch 17 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 18 - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 19 [SP No. 1-101-026] FUNCTION COMMENTS Do not change the settings. Not used 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the Extended scanner page scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 memory after memory...
  • Page 957 Bit Switches System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings) System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030] FUNCTION COMMENTS RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top 0: ON line of the LCD panel during communication. 1: OFF 1: Codes are switched off (no display) Do not change these settings.
  • Page 958 Bit Switches transmission. This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is RTI/CSI display priority displayed on the LCD while the machine is 0: RTI 1: CSI communicating in G3 non-standard mode. File No. printing 0: Enabled 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports. 1: Disabled If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the...

  • Page 959: I-Fax Switches

    Bit Switches (G3 reception) the machine receives it. 0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after 1: After receiving all pages the machine receives all the pages in the memory. 5/6 Not used Do not change the factory settings. 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit Action when a fax SC has...
  • Page 960 Bit Switches this size before sending. The default is A4. If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error. I-fax Switch 01 [SP No. 1-102-002] FUNCTION COMMENTS Original Line Resolution of TX...
  • Page 961 Bit Switches When this switch is On (1): Images scanned in inches are sent in inches. Images scanned in mm are converted to inches. Images received in inches are transmitted in inches. Images received in mm are converted to inches. I-fax Switch 02 [SP No.
  • Page 962 Bit Switches The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string. 01: “Displayed” Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with “displayed” in the 2nd part: Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string. 10: Reserved 11: Reserved A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00”...
  • Page 963 Bit Switches FUNCTION COMMENTS Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents. 0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is used.
  • Page 964 Bit Switches For example: "1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9 destinations. 0: Not recorded 1: Recorded I-Fax Automatic Re-dial Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials Setting 0: OFF when an error occurs. 1: ON 2-7 Not Used I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No.
  • Page 965 Bit Switches 0-3 Not used Do not change the settings This setting determines the number of retries when connection and transmission fails due to 4-7 Restrict TX Retries errors. 01-F (1-15 Hex) I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011] I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No.

  • Page 966: Printer Switches

    Bit Switches 4.3.3 PRINTER SWITCHES Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
  • Page 967 Bit Switches Printer Switch 01 [SP No. 1-103-002] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-2 Not used Do not change the settings. Maximum print width used in the setup protocol Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = Not used These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = A3 switch 01 is “1”.
  • Page 968 Bit Switches 3rd paper feed station usage used for the Specified Cassette Selection for fax printing feature. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled LCT usage for fax printing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 5-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
  • Page 969 Bit Switches then the document is split into 2 pages. Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005 FUNCTION COMMENTS Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above. <Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm) “N”...
  • Page 970 Bit Switches Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Size Printing feature is enabled. Cross reference 0: Printing will not start Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5 1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of paper, based on the paper size selection priority tables.
  • Page 971 Bit Switches Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: A paper size that has the same width as the Paper size selection priority received data is selected first. 0: Width 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all 1: Length...

  • Page 972: Communication Switches

    Bit Switches among separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio. (Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected 0: ON paper size when page separation has taken place. 1: OFF Other pages are printed without reduction. Printer Switch 0F [SP No.
  • Page 973 Bit Switches Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR/MMR/JBIG Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR to be used in the transmission and to be declared Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
  • Page 974 Bit Switches (0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This does not work when manually dialed.
  • Page 975 Bit Switches 300 dpi 18(L) 36(H) 400 dpi 24(L) 48(H) Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the 0: 5% 1: 10% acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end. Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
  • Page 976 Bit Switches Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 09 [SP No. 1-104-010] FUNCTION COMMENTS Adjusts the interval of the I-fax dialing. The interval of I-fax dialing is calculated by 0-7 IP-Fax dial interval setting following formula.
  • Page 977 Bit Switches any fax messages. If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing signals and go into receive mode even if there is no memory available. This will result in communication failure. Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015] FUNCTION COMMENTS 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s...
  • Page 978 Bit Switches Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.) Communication Switch 14 [SP No. 1-104-021] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format are transmitted without conversion. In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in mm format are transmitted without conversion.
  • Page 979 Bit Switches Optional G3 unit (G3-2) Change this bit to "1" when installing the first 0: Off optional G3 unit (G3-2). 1: On Not used Do not change the factory settings. Optional G3 unit (G3-3) Change this bit to "1" when installing the second 0: Off optional G3 unit (G3-3).
  • Page 980 Bit Switches FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-4 Not used Do not change the factory settings. IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers receiving data to each IP-Fax dial-in 0: Off number. 1: On IP-Fax dial-in number is 4 digit-number. 6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings. Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1B [SP No.

  • Page 981: G3 Switches

    Bit Switches Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings) Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings) 4.3.5 G3 SWITCHES G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001] FUNCTION COMMENTS Monitor speaker during...
  • Page 982 Bit Switches 0-1 Not used Do not change the settings. 2-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will DIS frame length not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are 0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
  • Page 983 Bit Switches 1: 2 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line. Do not change the settings. Not Used 0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible. V.8 protocol Note: 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always 1: Enabled bad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
  • Page 984 Bit Switches 0: Off ringing). Do not change this setting 1: On 0: No detection Outside Japan 1: Detection Inside Japan only G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the...
  • Page 985 Bit Switches 24.0k 26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k Other settings - Not used Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps. These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17 speeds.
  • Page 986 Bit Switches 19.2k 21.6k 24.0k 26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k Other settings - Not used Modem types available for reception Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting V.27ter V.27ter,V.29 The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the V.27ter, available modem type for the machine V.29, V.33...
  • Page 987 Bit Switches (tx mode: Internal) frequencies because of the length of wire between Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None the modem and the telephone exchange. Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low Use the dedicated transmission parameters for Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium specific receivers.
  • Page 988 Bit Switches Do not change the settings. Not used G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011] FUNCTION COMMENTS Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop reception...
  • Page 989 Bit Switches 0: 6 s 1: 12 s data after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to send data.

  • Page 990: G3-2/3 Switches

    Bit Switches Alarm when the handset is off-hook at the end of If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the communication handset is off-hook at the end of fax 0: Disabled communication, change this bit to “1”. 1: Enabled 2/3 Not used Do not change the settings.
  • Page 991 Bit Switches G3-2 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-106-002] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0-3 Not used Do not change the settings. 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will DIS frame length not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are 0: 10 bytes, 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
  • Page 992 Bit Switches 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble. G3-2 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-106-004] FUNCTION COMMENTS 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS detection number DIS frame twice. (Echo countermeasure) 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for 0: 1 the second DIS which is caused by echo on the 1: 2...
  • Page 993 Bit Switches PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals. This bit is not effective in V.34 communications. Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back page after receiving a negative before sending the next page if a negative code is code (RTN or PIN) received.
  • Page 994 Bit Switches 14.4k 16.8k 19.2k 21.6k 24.0k 26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k Other settings - Not used Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps. These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17 speeds.
  • Page 995 Bit Switches 9.6k Cross reference: V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2 12.0k 14.4k 16.8k 19.2k 21.6k 24.0k 26.4k 28.8k 31.2k 33.6k Other settings - Not used Modem types available for reception The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting...
  • Page 996 Bit Switches Other settings - Not used G3-2 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-106-008] FUNCTION COMMENTS Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange. PSTN cable equalizer Use the dedicated transmission parameters for (tx mode: Internal)
  • Page 997 Bit Switches 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone Parameter selection for dial detection. tone detection 1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with 0: Normal parameter SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial 1: Specific parameter tone cannot be detected when the "Normal parameter: 0"...

  • Page 998: Ip Fax Switches

    Bit Switches Do not change the settings. Not used When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 Reconstruction time for the recommendation.
  • Page 999 Bit Switches 0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) gatekeeper for IP-Fax. IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse Reverses the T30 bit signal. 0: LSB first, 1: MSB first When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does IP Fax max bit rate setting not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
  • Page 1000 Bit Switches switch combination. Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time) The default is "0000" (00H). IP Fax Switch 02 [SP No. 1-111-003] FUNCTION COMMENTS When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is decided by the maker code.
  • Page 1001 Bit Switches 1: Limit for image compression 1: When the other end machine is Ciscco, this permits the image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM communication. Not used Do not change these settings. IP Fax Switch 03 [SP No. 1-111-004] FUNCTION COMMENTS Effective field limitation for G3...
  • Page 1002 Bit Switches IP Fax Switch 04 [SP No. 1-111-005] FUNCTION COMMENTS Sets the TCF error threshold level. TCF error threshold [00 to 0f] The default is "1111" (0fH). Not used Do not change these settings. IP Fax Switch 05 [SP No. 1-111-006] FUNCTION COMMENTS Modem bit rate setting for transmission...
  • Page 1003 Bit Switches 26.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 31.2 Kbps 33.6 Kbps Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem for transmission. The default is "00" (V29). Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17 Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V34* Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Not used *V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
  • Page 1004 Bit Switches 19.2 Kbps 21.6 Kbps 24.0 Kbps 26.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 31.2 Kbps 33.6 Kbps Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17). Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 V27ter V27ter, V29 V27ter, V29, V33...
  • Page 1005 Bit Switches timeout timeout. 0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted Do not change this setting. Not used Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after 0: No hang up DIS reception. 1: Hang up after transmitting DCN Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done 0: 1 time, 1: 2 times...
  • Page 1006 Bit Switches Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the T0 timer adjustment interval between "setup" data transmission Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec and T.38 phase decision. If your destination Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec return is late on the network or G3 fax return Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec is late, adjust the longer interval timer.

  • Page 1007: Ncu Parameters

    NCU Parameters 4.4 NCU PARAMETERS The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105);...
  • Page 1008 NCU Parameters Address Function Sweden Korea Switzerland Turkey Portugal Greece Holland Hungary Spain Czech Israel Poland Address Function Unit Remarks 680501 Line current detection time Line current detection is disabled. 680502 Line current wait time 20 ms Line current is not detected if 680501 680503 Line current drop detect time...
  • Page 1009 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks PSTN dial tone permissible drop 68050C time 68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW) 68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH) Detection is disabled if 68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms this contains FF. PSTN ring-back tone off detection 680510 20 ms time...
  • Page 1010 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone PABX dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled. 68051A limit (low byte) 68051B PABX dial tone detection time 68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) If 68051B contains FF, 68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH) the machine pauses for...
  • Page 1011 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone PABX busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled. 680529 limit (low byte) 68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1 68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1 20 ms 68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2 68052D...
  • Page 1012 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks lower limit (high byte) contain FF(H), tone International dial tone frequency detection is disabled. 680537 lower limit (low byte) International dial tone detection 680538 time International dial tone reset time 680539 If 680538 contains FF, (LOW) the machine pauses for International dial tone reset time...
  • Page 1013 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks the pause time (680548 / 680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) 680549). Country dial tone continuous tone 680546 time Country dial tone permissible drop 680547 time 20 ms 680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW) 680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH) Time between opening or closing...
  • Page 1014 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks SP2-103-018 680550 DTMF tone on time (parameter 17). 1 ms SP2-103-019 680551 DTMF tone off time (parameter 18). SP2-103-020 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 680552 (parameter 19). signals while dialing –3.5 dBm See Note 5.
  • Page 1015 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks for this interval. International dial access code For a code of 100: 68055B (High) 68055B - F1 68055C - 00 68055C International dial access code (Low) This time is waited for each pause input after the PSTN access code.
  • Page 1016 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-004 680573 frequency: range 1, lower limit (parameter 03). Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-005 680574 frequency: range 2, upper limit (parameter 04). Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-006 680575 frequency: range 2, lower limit (parameter 05).
  • Page 1017 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms Other Not used Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms Other Not used Bits 4 to 7 - Not used 680583...
  • Page 1018 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks Do not change the 6805AA Not used setting. 6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms 6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms The data is coded in the Number of CNG cycles required for 6805AD same way as address...
  • Page 1019 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks level See Note 7. 6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission 6805B8 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB) level PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission 6805B9 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB) level Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N...
  • Page 1020 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks Here is a summary of the fixed voltage settings (1: Fixed) for an externally connected line. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Not used 2.75 V 5.5 V 22 V 41.25 V RT=0 (Low) Bit 1 Bit 1 sets the level of...
  • Page 1021 NCU Parameters Address Function Unit Remarks 22 V 41.25 V NOTES If a setting is not required, store FF in the address. Italy and Belgium only RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning. Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium) Bit 1 - Not used Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy) If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
  • Page 1022 NCU Parameters and Di closing Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.

  • Page 1023: Dedicated Transmission Parameters

    Dedicated Transmission Parameters 4.5 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
  • Page 1024 Dedicated Transmission Parameters second. Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h) FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used. Do not program a value between 79h and FEh. Switch 01 FUNCTION COMMENTS Tx level Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 If communication with a particular...
  • Page 1025 Dedicated Transmission Parameters Modem rate fallback occurs frequently. Do not use settings other than listed on the left. If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting is used. Switch 02 FUNCTION COMMENTS Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long, the initial modem rate Bit3 Bit2...
  • Page 1026 Dedicated Transmission Parameters 33600 Disabled Other settings: Not used 4-7 Not used Do not change the settings. Switch 03 FUNCTION COMMENTS Inch-mm conversion before tx The machine uses inch-based resolutions for Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 scanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed = Inch-mm conversion copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if available...
  • Page 1027 Dedicated Transmission Parameters For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use ECM during transmission the (0, 0) setting. Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is...
  • Page 1028 Dedicated Transmission Parameters MMR Compression mode for e-mail attachments Switches MMR compression on and off for files 0: Off attached to e-mails for sending. 1: On Not used Do not change these settings. Designates the bits to reference for The "0" selection (default) references the settings for compression method of Bits 00, 01, 02 above.
  • Page 1029 Dedicated Transmission Parameters 1: No registration. Switch 02 FUNCTION COMMENTS Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 200 x 100 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x100. 0: Off 1: On Line resolution of e-mail attachment: 200 x 200 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x 200.
  • Page 1030 Dedicated Transmission Parameters Switch 04 FUNCTION COMMENTS If the other ends have the addresses, which have Full mode address the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine selection determines them as full mode standard machines. 0: Full mode address This machine attaches the "demand of reception 1: No full mode (simple confirmation"...

  • Page 1031: Service Ram Addresses

    Service RAM Addresses 4.6 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.” 680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 680002(H) - Year (BCD) 680003(H) - Month (BCD) 680004(H) - Day (BCD) 680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII) 680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
  • Page 1032 Service RAM Addresses Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 1: Not used Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 6: Not used Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On...
  • Page 1033 Service RAM Addresses Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On Bits 6 and 7: Not used 6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used. Bit 2: Authorized reception 0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted. 1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
  • Page 1034 Service RAM Addresses (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT...
  • Page 1035 Rev. 01/2009 Service RAM Addresses 0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions 1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1: On Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
  • Page 1036 Service RAM Addresses Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16) (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bits 1 to 7: Not used 6800E7(H) –...
  • Page 1037 Service RAM Addresses Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Bits 2 to 7: Not used 680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used 680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches –...
  • Page 1038 Service RAM Addresses 680384(H) – Hour 680385(H) – Minute 680386(H) – Second 680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday 680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings) Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed...

This manual is also suitable for:

D011D012D013D091D092Aficio mp 4001sp ... Show all

Table of Contents